Nec 2400 Ipx Users Manual NEAX Installation

2400 IPX to the manual 1b97794c-ce2c-4eaa-a432-22de7bb45709

2015-01-24

: Nec Nec-2400-Ipx-Users-Manual-331443 nec-2400-ipx-users-manual-331443 nec pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 428 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Installation Manual

ND-71548 (E)

ISSUE 2

Installation Manual

AUGUST 2002

NEC Corporation

To view the latest issue of this document go to NEC Knowledgebase @ http://www.kbase.cns.nec.com.au &search for NEC-7128

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications,

functions, or features, at any time, without notice.

NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employ-

ees and customers. The information contained herein is the property

of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written

approval from NEC Corporation.

All brand names and product names on this document are trade-

marks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

NEC Corporation

ND-71548 (E) PRODUCT LIABILITY

PL- 1

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

BEFORE THE USE OF THIS MANUAL

1. FOR SAFETY USE

Here explains the safety use for the customer, which prevents danger to the life and damage to the property ac-

cidentally. The following are symbols and their meanings. Please read the following carefully before using this

manual.

SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION

DANGER

This symbol indicates danger. You might be involved in a situation that

could cause deadly and bodily injury if you take wrong action.

WARNING

This symbol indicates warning. You might be involved in a situation that

could cause bodily injury and serious system fault if you take wrong ac-

tion.

ATTENTION

This symbol indicates attention. The system might not acheive its perfor-

mance or lead to the system stall if you take wrong action.

This telephone system is designed for use in the country NEC provides and can not be used in any other country.

If system-down, malfunction, defects, and external factors (such as electricity failure) cause profit loss indirectly, NEC does

not take any responsibilities for the profit loss.

We pay careful attention to making this manual, however, when you find mistakes on this manual, notify to NEC.

Contact the supplier or the service technician if the system needs repairs and installation.

Please read all the manuals related to your system carefully.

PRODUCT LIABILITY ND-71548 (E)

PL- 2

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

2. NOTICE WHEN USED

2.1 Consideration of PBX, Power-related Equipment and Peripheral Equipment

This item describes the consideration before using PBX, the power-related equipment, and the peripheral equip-

ment (such as console, MDF, DAU, telephone, PC, printer, etc).

Preserve the following:

DANGER

When the system gives off smoke or burning smell, it might cause a fire, an electric

shock, or a failure if the system keeps operating. Turn off the power and confirm the

smoke disappears, and then contact supplier.

If equipment (such as PBX, Main Power, cabinet, and peripheral equipment) fall down

and be broken, turn off the power, and then contact the supplier.

If the inside of PBX or Main Power is wet by liquid such as water, turn off the power.

It might cause a fire, an electric shock, or a failure if the system keeps operating.

Do not touch the internal parts of Main Power for the purpose of disassembly and re-

modeling. It might cause a fire, an electric shock, or a failure.

(NEC does not take any responsibilities if the system or the equipment is disassembled

or remodeled.)

Do not put any container (such as vase, cup, and cosmetics) on Main Power and periph-

eral equipment. It might cause a fire, an electric shock, or a failure.

PWR

ND-71548 (E) PRODUCT LIABILITY

PL- 3

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

DANGER

Do not damage, remake, forcefully bend, forcefully extract, nor forcefully twist an elec-

tric code and a wiring to/from PBX, Main Power and peripheral equipment. It might

cause a fire, an electric shock, or a failure. If the wiring is damaged, ask the supplier to

fix it.

Insert the electric plug into the outlet properly. Confirm no dust is on the blade of plug;

it might cause a fire.

Do not use other than the power designated when installed.

Do not try to fix or move Main Power by yourselves without the supplier or service tech-

nician’s help. Please ask them when the repair or the movement is necessary.

Do not put any metal or combustible object into a vent of PBX, Main Power, and the

peripheral equipment. If the object is in those equipment, turn off the power and ask the

supplier. It might cause a fire, an electric shock, or a failure if the system keeps operat-

ing.

Be careful of using the display part which the peripheral equipment has. In the case of

liquid crystal, the liquid is leaked and causes harm to human body and systems.

Before connecting customer-provided equipment (such as the other company products)

with NEC products such as PBX and peripheral equipment, ask the supplier and make

sure your equipment is compatible with NEC product. If it is not confirmed, do not con-

nect them. It might cause a fire or an electric shock.

dust

PWR

PRODUCT LIABILITY ND-71548 (E)

PL- 4

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

WARNING

Fix the equipment. Do not put any object on PBX and Main Power; it might be danger-

ous if the object should fall down.

When plugging off a plug, be sure to grip the plug and extract it. If you grip the code

and extract it, it might cause a fire and an electric shock.

If a fault is considered as the lightening cause, ask the supplier.

Other than fulfilling the appropriate humidity and temperature, it is necessary to consid-

er the maintenance operation and the all-time ventilation in non-loading operation dur-

ing day-off and night. For example, when the height above floor is 1 m (3.281 feet), the

temperature should be from 20 to 25 °C (68 to 77 °F ) and the humidity should be more

or less 50 %.

ND-71548 (E) PRODUCT LIABILITY

PL- 5

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

WARNING

Be careful of using a battery as following:

Rechargeable lead battery is used as the emergency battery of PBX. Check the back-

up for an electricity failure.

Battery electrolyte is harmful to human body. If the battery electrolyte is put on the

cloth, clean it using enough amount of water.

Do not cause the battery short intentionally. Do not put it near fire or put it into fire.

Do not damage it, such as disassembly, falling, and impact.

The battery life varies depending on the surroundings. The battery life is approxi-

mately three years. If the battery is used outside with high temperature, the battery

life is shortened to approximately one year.

If not replacing terminal or dead battery, the PBX system will not work in case such as

power failure. Besides it might cause smoking or fire due to leaking battery electrolyte.

Perform the periodic diagnosis surely. Note that the battery is one of periodic replace-

ment parts whose cost are charged to the customer. We recommend you to make a con-

tract with supplier or service technician about the routine maintenance.

Do not touch the peripheral equipment by wet hand. Do not wet the peripheral equip-

ment.

Do not touch the ink head and the internal of the printer. When replacing the ink ribbon

or the paper, make sure it is cool enough.

Do not drop nor impact the peripheral equipment. It might cause a failure.

155 53 13 123

Connection:

PWR:

Rcv:

Snd:

TCP UDP

ENT

1 2 3

45 6

789

155

53 13 123

Protocol:

TCP

Connection:

PWR:

Rcv:

Snd:

TCP

UDP

ENT

123

456

789

PRODUCT LIABILITY ND-71548 (E)

PL- 6

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

ATTENTION

Do not use benzine, thinner, and alcohol for cleaning. When it is difficult to clean dust

and dirt, put weaken neutral detergent onto a cloth, and give the cloth a wiring. Clean

dust and dirt with the cloth, and rub them with a dry cloth.

Do not place equipment in the following:

Locations which receive direct sunlight

Locations where the moisture exceeds the allowed level

Locations which might be wet with water, oil, and chemicals

Locations which is particularly low in temperature (such as an ice compartment)

Locations which receive the electric wave or the magnetism from TV and (two-way)

radio

Locations which receive the illegal electric wave

Note that the life of PBX and Main Power is shorten if placed in the location affected

by much of hydrogen sulfide or salt, such as seaside area.

Thinner

ND-71548 (E) PRODUCT LIABILITY

PL- 7

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

2.2 Installation Environment

These items describe the consideration before the installation.

Preserve the following:

2.2.1 Oscillation

2.2.2 Floor, Wall and Ceiling

2.2.3 Windows

2.2.4 Fire Extinguishert

WARNING To prevent the system from moving and falling down which might injure the person, it is

necessary to make the resistance to earthquake. Besides the system is installed in the always-

oscillation environment such as locations near the motor and the automatic door. Install PBX

with anchor bolts for resistance to earthquake.

WARNING

The materials of wall and ceiling must be non-static electrification and heat insulation.

Because the battery life varies depending on the surrounding temperature, the room where

the battery is installed must be with good ventilation, using ventilator and blowhole. Besides,

it should not be installed near the motor or the power transformer.

How to resist to static electrification

The floor around the PBX must be made up with resistance material to Electric Static Dis-

charge (ESD).

ATTENTION

Please close all the windows if the location is affected by dust, salty wind, or corrosive gas.

Besides, curtains or blinds are necessary to avoid direct sunlight.

WARNING Please place the extinguisher for electric fire (such as carbon-gas extinguisher and halon-gas

extinguisher). It is recommend that automatic fire detector be equipped with the room. In

case of smoking and firing, turn off the power for Main Power and backup battery. Then, use

the extinguisher for electric fire to put out the fire. Do not inhale the smorking while extin-

guishing the fire.

PRODUCT LIABILITY ND-71548 (E)

PL- 8

Issue 2

2.2.5 Safety Environment

2.2.6 Temperature and Humidity

2.2.7 Air Conditioning Facilities

2.3 Notice Regarding Lightenning Strikes

WARNING

Consider countermeasures for disasters (such as firing, flood, and earthquake) and safety for

the operator. It is necessary to keep cleaning the machine room. Also, be careful of spraying

an insecticide not to affect the machinery.

WARNING Other than fulfilling the appropriate humidity and temperature, it is necessary to consider the

maintenance operation and the all-time ventilation in non-loading operation during day-off

and night. For example, when the height above floor is 1 m (3.281 feet), the temperature

should be from 20 to 25 ℃ (68 to 77 °F ) and the humidity should be more or less 50 %.

WARNING

The power and installation of air conditioners must be different from those of PBX.

To keep electromagnetic arc from making noise, attach surge limiting capacitor and resistor

on the coil of the electromagnetic switch.

It might be necessary to adjust the ventilation to be air conditioned equally through the

machine room.

In the case of using duct or ceiling air conditions, do not place PBX in the location where the

dew might fall.

If PBX is installed in the location near the ventilation, the PBX might be damaged due to the

air containing humidity and exhaust.

WARNING It is necessary to take proper procedures to avoid damage to the PBX caused by local lightening strikes

and other electrical surges.

As for grounding conductors, there needs to be two-type grounding conductors; one is below 10 Ω

(Type 1) and the other is below 100 Ω (Type 2). In particular, the Type 1 is used for the electronics

circuit installment, therefore, it must be used as isolated system to keep from electricity difference

caused by lightening strikes.

The Type 1 is used when connecting the FE of PBX, the PE of Main Power, MDF, etc.

Extract the ground terminal (grounding electrode of three terminals) from the earth board same with

that of the main equipment. The ground terminal attached with AC100V plug outlet is used for MAT,

printer, MODEM, and measurement machine for maintenance.

ND-71548 (E) PRODUCT LIABILITY

PL- 9

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

2.4 Periodic Repair Parts and Disposables

ATTENTION Replace the periodic repair parts such as fan, battery, backup battery, HD, fuse, and display. If not

change the parts and past the periodic term, sudden traffic fault might lead to the whole system failure

and damaging. Replace the disposables such as ink ribbon, FD, recording paper, and headset.

We recommend you to make a contract for the maintenance service.

PRODUCT LIABILITY ND-71548 (E)

PL- 10

Issue 2

PRODUCT LIABILITY

This page is for your notes.

ND-71548 (E)

ISSUE 2

AUGUST, 2002

NEAX2400 IPX

Internet Protocol eXchange

Installation Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

ND-71548 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page i

Issue 2

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.2 How to Follow NAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.3 How To Follow Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.4 Figure and Table Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2.5 Essential/Critical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2.1 Temperature And Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2.2 Heat Generation From Switching Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3. FLOOR SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4. FLOOR LOAD REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

5. EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

5.1 Floor Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

5.2 Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5.3 Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5.4 Lighting Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

6. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

6.1 Main Source Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

6.2 Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

6.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

6.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

7. MDF REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

8. INSTALLATION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

9. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

9.1 System Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

9.2 Circuit Card Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

9.3 Preparation of Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

9.4 Preparation of Module Group Face Layout And Port Accommodation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

9.5 Preparation of Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

10. INSTALLATION CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

10.1 AC Input, DC Power, And Ground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

10.2 Cables Between The PBX And MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-71548 (E)

Page ii

Issue 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

NAP-200-001 Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

NAP-200-002 Marketing, Leveling, and Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

1. WHEN SECURING THE PBX DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

2. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH THE SPECIAL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3. WHEN SECURING PBX WITH FLOOR ELEVATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4. MARKING, LEVELING AND DRILLING FOR MDF, POWER EQUIPMENT,

AND PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

NAP-200-003 Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

1. UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2. INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

NAP-200-004 Installation of the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

1. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

2. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

NAP-200-005 Mounting of Units and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

1. MOUNTING OF UNITS AND MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2. INSTALLATION OF FANU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3. PROCEDURE FOR FANU ON THE TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4. PROCEDURE FOR FANU IN THE FAN BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5. ATTACHING THE ADDITIONAL NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU) TO THE BASEU . . . . . . . . . 67

NAP-200-006 Installation of Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

NAP-200-007 Installation of the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

NAP-200-008 Connection of Power and Ground Cables from the Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 72

1. CONNECTION OF THE POWER AND GROUND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

2. CONNECTION OF DC-DC CONVERTER FOR TELEPHONE SETS EQUIPPED

WITH MESSAGE WAITING LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

3. END JOINTING OF POWER AND GROUND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4. BRANCHING OF POWER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

NAP-200-009 Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

1. PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

2. EXTRACTION OF MOUNTED CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

3. MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4. SETTING OF SWITCH POSITIONS ON CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

5. INSTALLATION OF CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

NAP-200-010 Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

NAP-200-011 Inter-Frame Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

NAP-200-012 Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

NAP-200-013 Cable Running from the PBX to MDF, ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

1. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MDF AND ATTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

2. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MAT AND SMDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

3. CONNECTIONS AT THE PBX SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

4. CABLE TYING AT THE PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

5. TERMINATION OF THE CABLES BETWEEN THE PBX AND THE MDF OR ATTCON ONTO

THE CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

NAP-200-014 Termination of Cables on MDF (Wire Accommodation of Each Cable) . . . . . . . . . 200

ND-71548 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page iii

Issue 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

NAP-200-015 Cable Termination and Cross Connections from MDF to Peripheral Equipment, C. O.

Lines, and Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

1. CROSS CONNECTION OF STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

2. CROSS CONNECTION OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

3. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR PFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

4. CROSS CONNECTION OF ALARM INDICATING PANEL AND MUSIC ON HOLD. . . . . . . . 208

5. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR TAS INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

6. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

7. CONNECTION OF ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

8. CONNECTION OF PAGING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

9. CROSS CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

10. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR DIGITAL INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

NAP-200-016 Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

1. CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

2. CALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE ATI CIRCUIT CARD AND MODULAR

ROSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

3. MOUNTING OF HEADSET (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

4. MOUNTING OF HANDSET (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

5. CONNECTION OF RECORDING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

6. 8-CORE LINE CABLE (INSTALLATION CABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

7. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

8. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE (FOR HOTEL SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

9. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

10. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER FOR ADD-ON CONSOLE (OPTIONAL). . . . . . . . . . . 260

11. CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

12. SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

13. ASSIGNMENT OF CONFIGURATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

14. HEADSET/HANDSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

15. HEADSET TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

16. MUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

17. REC CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

18. SUP CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

19. REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

20. BLF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

21. HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

22. 2ND RINGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

23. RINGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

24. UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

NAP-200-017 Installation of Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable Connections 277

1. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

2. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTION BY USING MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

3. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM MESSAGE PRINTER AND CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . 282

NAP-200-018 Connections of SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

3. SYSTEM STARTUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

NAP-200-019 Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-71548 (E)

Page iv

Issue 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

NAP-200-020 Program Install and Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

NAP-200-021 Assignment of Office Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

NAP-200-022 Check of Lamp Indications and System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

NAP-200-023 Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

1. HOW TO ENTER DATA IN THE TEST CHECK COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

2. BASIC CONNECTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

2.2 Basic Connection Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

NAP-200-024 DT (Dial Tone) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

NAP-200-025 Station to Station Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

3. SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

3.2 System Initialized Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

NAP-200-026 System Changeover Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

NAP-200-027 System Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

NAP-200-028 Circuit Card Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

4. PORT CONNECTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

4.2 Port Connection Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

NAP-200-029 ORT (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

NAP-200-030 ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

NAP-200-031 Line (LC, ELC, DLC, Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

NAP-200-032 Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

NAP-200-033 Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)

Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

NAP-200-034 Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card)

Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

NAP-200-035 SND (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

NAP-200-036 3-party Conference Trunk Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

NAP-200-037 Connection Test-Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

NAP-200-038 Connection Test-Digital Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service . . . . . . 343

NAP-200-039 Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Access Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

NAP-200-040 Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Transfer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

NAP-200-041 Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

NAP-200-042 Howler & Ringing Signal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

5. OVERALL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

5.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

5.2 Overall Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

NAP-200-043 Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

NAP-200-044 Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

NAP-200-045 Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

NAP-200-046 Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

NAP-200-047 Test of Connection and Alternate Routing to All Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

NAP-200-048 Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

NAP-200-049 PAD Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

6. IP CONNECTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

ND-71548 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page v

Issue 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

6.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

6.2 IP Connection Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

NAP-200-050 IP PAD Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

NAP-200-051 IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for FCCS) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

NAP-200-052 IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for CCIS) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

NAP-200-053 IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for H.323) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

NAP-200-054 PHA Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

NAP-200-055 PHD Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

NAP-200-056 PHC Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

CHAPTER 6 FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

2. OUTLINE OF PROCEDURE FOR FAULT RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

NAP-200-057 Abnormal Lamp Indications After System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

NAP-200-058 DT (Dial Tone) Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

NAP-200-059 Station to Station Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

CHAPTER 7 WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

1. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

1.1 Preservation of Office Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

2. PREPARATION OF TEST RESULT REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

3. MOUNTING OF THE FRONT AND REAR COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

4. ATTACHMENT OF INTER-FRAME BRACKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

5. SITE CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-71548 (E)

Page vi

Issue 2

This page is for your notes.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 1

Issue 2

INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1. GENERAL

The figure below shows the outer view of the NEAX2400 IPX-referred to in the remainder of this manual as

“the system.” During the period from equipment carry-in of the system till it is placed in service, the following

must be performed:

• Installation of the system and its peripheral equipment

• System startup

• Installation test

• Miscellaneous jobs

This manual explains how to proceed with these activities and related precaution. It is recommended that the

installer thoroughly read Section 2., “HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL” before engaging in any phase of

the installation.

Figure 1-1 NEAX2400 IPX Outer View

MGC: Media Gateway Controller

LPM: Local Processor Module

PIM: Port Interface Module

This figure shows the outer view of the fully expanded system.

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TOPU

FANU

TOPU: Top Unit

BASEU: Base Unit

FANU: Fan Unit

SYSTEM SELECT

MBR

1 3

SLOT

NO.

0123456

SYSTEM SELECT

MBR

1 3

SLOT

NO.

0123456

NEC

LPM (MGC)

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TOPU

FANU

LPM (MGC)

SYSTEM SELECT

MBR

SLOT NO.

NO.

0123456

SYSTEM SELECT

MBR

SLOT

NO. 0123456

NEC

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

CHAPTER 1 ND-71548 (E)

Page 2

Issue 2

INTRODUCTION

The figure below shows an example of the system configuration of NEAX2400 IPX.

PHA : Handles control signals sent to/from an analog terminal connected to Analog Media Con-

verter.

PHD : Handles control signals sent to/from IP terminals such as DtermIP INASET and Dterm SP20.

PHC : Sends/receives CCIS control signal from/to IP network.

IP PAD : Provides interface function between terminals/devices on LAN and conventional network

such as PSTN, ISDN, and private network.

Figure 1-2 System Configuration (Example)

SYSTEM SELECT

SLOT NO.

NO.

SYSTEM SELECT

NEC

MGC

IP Enabled Dterm

Dterm Series E/Dterm75

Analog Terminals

Analog Terminal

Analog

Terminal

Analog MC

Dterm SP20

PSTN/

Private Network

concentrator

VDSL

adapter

COT/

TLT

IPTRK

LC with

splitter

MGC: Media Gateway Controller

MC: Media Converter

ELC: Electric Line Circuit

LC: Line Circuit

PHA: Protocol Handler for Analog MC

PHD: Protocol Handler for IP Enabled Dterm

PHC: Protocol Handler for CCIS

Home

Enter

DtermIP INASET

PHC

VDSL CONCENTRATOR

VC500T

MC-2A

PWR

LINE LINK 100M

-OPERATION-

Tx/Rx

PHD

PHA

ELC

IP PAD

IP Network

controlled by PHD controlled by PHA

CCIS No.7

NEAX2400 IPX

Message

Directory

Speaker

Answer

Redial

Conf

Transfer

Mic

Feature

Speaker

Recall

term

DIP

NEC

Dterm Series i / D IP

term

NEC

PHC

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 3

Issue 2

INTRODUCTION

2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL

2.1 Outline

The requiring work is divided into the following chapters. Basically, the work is performed in the order of these

chapters:

• Chapter 2, “INSTALLATION DESIGN”

This chapter explains installation design and preparation of the required installation materials.

• Chapter 3, “INSTALLATION PROCEDURE”

This chapter explains the procedures pertaining to equipment carry-in, installation, power supply (cabling,

wiring), etc., of the system, and also explains the installation procedures concerning peripheral equipment

(MDF, Rectifier, Terminal Equipment.).

• Chapter 4, “SYSTEM STARTUP”

This chapter explains the procedures for initial power-on and office data entry upon completion of the sys-

tem installation.

• Chapter 5, “INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE”

This chapter explains the test procedures to be performed, upon completion of the system startup, to deter-

mine:

• If the system operates as directed by the office data.

• Whether reinitialization or system changeover can be performed.

• Whether the interface with the associated distant office is normal.

• Chapter 6, “FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS”

This chapter explains the recovery procedure which the installer needs to follow in case of a fault occur-

rence while engaging in work pertaining to system startup and basic connections.

• Chapter 7, “WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS”

This chapter explains various kinds of work and site cleaning, etc. which must be performed after comple-

tion of installation tests so that the system can be cut over normally.

2.2 How to Follow NAPs

This manual categorizes the work contents of installation, system startup and installation tests into detailed work

items, and an NEC Action Procedure (NAP) number is assigned to each of such work item.

The following shows how to interpret a NAP number.

Figure 1-3 shows an example of an NAP.

NAP- XXX-XXX

Serial Number (000-999) Note

Work Category Number

200: Installation

215: System Startup, Installation Test, Fault Recovery

Note: Performing NAPs in sequential order by serial numbers is recommended.

CHAPTER 1 ND-71548 (E)

Page 4

Issue 2

INTRODUCTION

Figure 1-3 Example of NAP

NAP- 200-004

Sheet 3/3

Installation of the Base Unit

1. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND

START

Securing the Base Unit Secure the Base Unit onto the special stand as per Figure

004-4.

Level Check Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the

level by inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

BASE U

SPECIAL STAND

BOLT (M-10)

LOCK WASHER

PLAIN WASHER

NAP Number

Sheet Number of NAP

Title of NAP

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 5

Issue 2

INTRODUCTION

2.3 How To Follow Trees

This manual explains performance of a predetermined procedure (work contents covered in each NAP) in a

“Tree” format as shown in Figure 1-4. Before engaging in the intended work, be sure to understand the work

contents by tracing the given tree.

Figure 1-4 Example of a Tree

START

On the MDF, make temporary cross connections between the Trunk for Direct-In Termination (DIT)

and an LC.

C.O. Line Incoming Call Station B dials the number of LC C (Station C).

Incoming Call to Station via

DIT Trunk The call terminates to Station A; Station A rings.

Confirm that the ringing is distinct from that of an intra-

office call or ordinary C.O. call.

• The ringing signal for Direct-In Termination calls can

be the same as that used for C.O. calls if the related

Office Data is assigned.

System Data SYS1, INDEX 72, SYS3, INDEX 0, and

parameter DR of Command “ARTD”.

Answer and Talk Station A goes off-hook.

Station A and B talk with each other.

Release Station A and B both go on-hook.

Remove the temporary cross connections.

END

CHAPTER 1 ND-71548 (E)

Page 6

Issue 2

INTRODUCTION

Figure 1-5 Static Caution Indication

This manual provides “Static Caution” indicators (see Figure 1-5) on pages where work involving static-sensi-

tive components is described.

The 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit, shown in Figure 1-6, is recommended as an effective coun-

termeasure against static electricity.

Figure 1-6 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit

Note: 3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing, Inc.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Connect ground wire to the frame.

Place the circuit card on a

conductive sheet.

wrist strap

conductive sheet

wrist strap

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 7

Issue 2

INTRODUCTION

2.4 Figure and Table Numbers

Each Figure and Table within this manual are numbered as shown below.

1. Figure and table in NAP

Figure XXX-X

Serial number of Figures in each NAP

Serial number (000-999) of the NAP in which the Figure exists.

2. Other figure and table

Table X-X

Serial number of Table in each Chapter

Number of the Chapter in which the Table exists.

Understanding this numbering rule will help you when looking for the desired Figure or Table.

2.5 Essential/Critical Information

To prevent accidents or equipment damage from occurring while work is being performed, each manual pro-

vides WARNING, CAUTION, and Note: indications to draw the technician’s attention to specific matters.

1. Meaning

WARNING: Personal injury may result if the warning is not heeded.

CAUTION: Damage to the equipment and/or the system may result if the caution is not heeded.

Note: Indicates an item which requires special attention.

2. Locations of Indicators

WARNING and CAUTION indications are located at the top of the page. Notes are included as part of the

work procedures on the page.

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 8

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION DESIGN

1. GENERAL

This chapter provides information pertaining to installation design and preparation of the required installation

materials. The following topics are discussed:

• Environmental Requirements

• Floor Space

• Floor Load Requirements

• Equipment Room Requirements

• Power Supply Requirements

• MDF Requirements

• Installation Tools

• System Accommodation

• Installation Cables

2. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

The PBX is sensitive to the same rises in temperature and humidity as a computer. Air conditioning may be re-

quired, depending on the installation environment. The following paragraphs address the following environ-

mental conditions.

• Temperature and Humidity

• Heat Generation from Switching Equipment

2.1 Temperature And Humidity

Table 2-1 shows the environmental conditions required in the switching equipment room.

If the switching system is operated in an environment that does not meet these specifications, the reliability of

the switching equipment may be impaired. Improper operating conditions can cause circuit boards, etc., to de-

teriorate. Therefore, to enable the equipment to operate for the extent of its expected lifetime, careful consider-

ation must be given to the location of the equipment, and to proper ventilation and air conditioning.

If no equipment is provided to remove the heat generated by the system, or if the temperature or humidity fluc-

tuates repeatedly, the system’s electronic parts can be adversely affected. Such conditions will promote corro-

sion of metal parts and deterioration of insulation, thereby lowering the overall reliability of the system.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 9

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Note: A short period means a period not exceeding three consecutive days (72 hours) or 15 days (360 hours) in

a year.

2.2 Heat Generation From Switching Equipment

Figure 2-1 shows heat generation from the switching equipment with respect to current consumption.

Figure 2-1 Heat Generation from Switching Equipment for the PBX

Table 2-1 Temperature and Humidity

TEMPERATURE RELATIVE

HUMIDITY REMARKS

During

Operations

Normal Operations 5°C - 30°C (41°F -86°F) 15% - 65%

Short Period Note 0°C - 40°C (32°F-104°F) 15% - 90%

During Storage & In Transit –18°C - 50°C (0°F -122°F) 8% - 90%

Temperature Change Max. 5°C/30 Min. (9°F/30 Min.) 90%

Note: BTU; British Thermal Unit (1 BTU=1058.4J)

BTU/hour

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000

No. of PORTS

3.5K

3.0K

2.5K

2.0K

1.5K

1.0K

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 10

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

3. FLOOR SPACE

1. The PBX requires floor space for the following system equipment:

• Switching Equipment (Module Group)

• Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)

•MDF

•Rectifier

• Batteries

• Attendant Console

2. The required floor space for the various equipment rooms is as follows.

• Switching Equipment Room: For installing the Module Group, MAT, MDF and Rectifier

• Battery Room: For installing Batteries

• Operator Room: For installing an Attendant Console with desk and chair

3. Equipment Room: Free Access Floor or Computer Floor

4. FLOOR LOAD REQUIREMENTS

Required floor capacities are as follows:

• Switching Equipment Room: More than 3430 Pa (71.6 pounds per square foot)

• Operator Room: More than 2940 Pa (61.4 pounds per square foot)

5. EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS

The following floor conditions should be considered prior to installation:

5.1 Floor Surface

1. Switching Equipment Room

• The maximum difference in floor level at each point within the room should be less than +5mm (0.2

inch).

• An elevated-type floor such as Free Access floor or computer room floor should be constructed.

2. Battery Room

• It is recommended that the floor have a slope (1/1000) and drain at the end of the slope.

• The floor surface should be made of acid-resistant materials.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 11

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

5.2 Wall

Switching Equipment Room

• A concrete wall is necessary so that cable racks can be installed (unless a free-access floor is used).

• It is recommended that the walls be painted so that the wall materials do not generate dust, etc.

• The maximum difference in level at the wall surface should be less than +5 mm (0.2 inch).

5.3 Ceiling

Switching Equipment Room

• The required ceiling height is more than 2.3 meters (7.5 feet).

5.4 Lighting Facilities

1. Switching Equipment Room

• Fluorescent lamps are recommended.

• No less than 200 lux at the floor level is necessary.

2. Operator Room

• Fluorescent lamps are recommended.

• No less than 200 lux at the floor level is necessary.

3. Battery Room

• Anti-explosion type lamps must be utilized.

• No less than 150 lux at the floor level is necessary.

6. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

6.1 Main Source Power

The PBX requires an operating power of -48 V DC ±5V DC. This DC operating power is supplied from the rec-

tifier which receives AC power from the commercial AC power source. For greater system reliability, it is rec-

ommended that the PBX be supplied with backup DC operating power for a predetermined duration from the

batteries installed as the auxiliary power supply source.

The batteries for the PBX must be connected in parallel with the -48 V DC output of the rectifier. Also, when

installing batteries, an EMF panel must be placed in-line (series) with the input -48 V DC supplied to the PBX.

This panel is necessary when changing the state of the rectifier from float to equalize and vice versa.

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 12

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Note 1: When the rectifier is in the equalize state (charging the batteries), the output DC voltage should be 1.5 to

2 volts higher than the float voltage. Examples of the voltages for floating and equalizing are listed below:

Float: 50.5 V DC

Equalize: 52 V DC (Refer to Note 2.)

Note 2: The Equalize voltage is 1.5 to 2 V higher when an EMF panel (Diode Drop) is utilized. When an EMF panel

is not provided, the Float and Equalize Voltage must be the same (50.5 V).

Note 3: The main source power is AC input.

Note 4: Noise caused in the -48 V output from the rectifier should be less than 5 mV.

6.2 Current Consumption

The PBX operates on -48 V ±5 V DC which is supplied from external power equipment (the rectifier and the

battery).

Various DC voltages required within the system are provided by the DC-DC converter in each module. The DC-

DC converter, upon receiving the -48 V DC source power, converts it into various DC voltages and supplies

them to the associated circuits.

Figure 2-2 shows the current consumption of the PBX.

Figure 2-2 Current Consumption of the PBX

(AMPS)

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000

No. of PORTS

-48V

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 13

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

6.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements

The Power Distribution Box (PDB) should be installed with the following considerations:

1. The AC power source service outlet and the fuse for the junction box should be provided independently of

any equipment other than the switching equipment.

2. A warning notice should be attached to be PDB circuit breaker so that it will not be turned off acciden-

tally.

3. The Power Distribution Box should be installed at a location that is easy to reach.

4. The Power Distribution Box should be installed at a location where the connecting cables extending to the

switching equipment will not be broken accidentally.

5. The PDB cables should be run in such a way that they do not hamper the technician performing the instal-

lation.

6. The Personal Computer (MAT) must have a separate AC service outlet.

6.4 Grounding

System grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level and is to be connected to a prede-

termined terminal in the PBX.

Standard grounding requirements are shown below.

• Communication grounding: Less than 1 ohm

• Security ground for Module Group: Less than 1 ohm

• Grounding for the line protector of the MDF: Less than 1 ohm

Note: The AC ripple of various types of grounding should be less than 1/2 V-pp.

7. MDF REQUIREMENTS

Either a self-standing or wall-mounted type MDF can be used. The MDF must be equipped with the following

types of terminal blocks.

• Arrester board for C.O. lines and external lines

• Test spring terminals for localization tests

• Local Block terminals

The number of terminals is to be determined according to the circuit configuration of the PBX and the number

of local lines.

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 14

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

8. INSTALLATION TOOLS

Table 2-2 shows the tools used in a typical NEAX2400 IPX installation.

Note: For selection of Clamping Tool, refer to Tables 2-8 through 2-10.

Table 2-2 Typical Installation Tools

FUNCTION TOOLS PURPOSE

Marking • Steel Tape Measure

•L-Square

• Iron Square

• Iron Level

• Center Punch

•Step Ladder

• Scriber

For Leveling and

Marking Plumb

Line

Drilling • Electric Drill

• Electric Vibration Drill

•Hammer

• Point Drill

• Drill Bit for Concrete

• Concrete Chisel

• Drill Bit for Metal

• Power Cable Drum

• Extension Cable

Drilling

Module Group and

Rack Installation

•Plump Bob

•Jigsaw

• Hacksaw Frame

• Hacksaw Blade

• Flat File

• Half Round File

• Set File

• Adjustable Angle Wrench

• Frame Cart

•Cutter

• Set Wrench

• Socket Wrench Set

•Step Ladder

• Phillips Screwdriver

• Screwdriver

• Plastic Hammer

Module Group and

Rack Installation

Power Cable

Installation

• Clamping Tool

(for End Terminal,

Branch Terminal)

• Phillips Screwdriver

• Screwdriver

•Cutter

Power Cable

Installation

See Note.

Miscellaneous • Circuit Tester

• Pocket Measure

• Scissors

• Wire Clipper

• Cable Cutter

• Nipper

•Wire Stripper

• Round Nose Pliers

• Non-Metallic Stick

•Solder-Helper

•Solder Sucker

• IC Clip

•Mini Test Probe

• Telephone Set

• Working Lamp

• Wrapping Tool

• Unwrapping Tool

• Soldering Iron

• Soldering Iron Stand

• Connector Clamping Tool

• Logic Checker and Counter

•Pen Light

• Precision Screwdriver (+)(-)

• IC Buzzer

• Tweezers

• Portable Field Service Kit

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 15

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION

9.1 System Accommodation

Module Group Configuration and Conditions for Configuration

The module group configuration of the PBX is shown in Figure 2-3, and the conditions for configuration are

shown in Table 2-3.

Figure 2-3 System Configuration

TOPU

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

LPM (MGC)

FANU

BASEU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TSWM

FANU

BASEU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

DUMMY

FANU

BASEU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

DUMMY

FANU

BASEU

BSCM

Multiple IMG Configuration

Single IMG Configuration

(Fully Expanded System)

TOPU

4-PIM

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

LPM (MGC)

FANU

BASEU

TOPU

3-PIM

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

LPM (MGC)

FANU

BASEU

TOPU

2-PIM

PIM1

PIM0

LPM (MGC)

BASEU

TOPU

1-PIM

PIM0

LPM (MGC)

BASEU

max. 1536 ports

(2048 time slots)

max. 6144 ports

(8192 time slots)

max. 4608 ports

max. 3072 ports

max. 1152 ports

(1536 time slots)

max. 768 ports

(1024 time slots)

max. 384 ports

(512 time slots)

FRONT VIEW

BSCM BSCM BSCM BSCM

TOPU : Top Unit

PIM : Port Interface Module

FANU : Fan Unit

LPM : Local Processor Module

MGC : Media Gateway Controller

BASEU : Base Unit

BSCM : Basic Control Module

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 16

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Note: A NFILU is mounted in BASEU.

Table 2-3 Conditions for Configuration

UNIT NAME NUMBER OF MODULES CONDITIONS REMARKS

FANU

(Fan Unit)

PIM

Less than two modules

Mounted in TOPU

PIM

Three or more modules

Mounted in between the 2nd PIM and

the 3rd PIM

2nd NFILU

(Noise Filter)

Less than two modules Not required Note

Three or more modules Mounted in BASEU

TOPU

(Top Unit)

Equipped with PZ-DK222 (KEY) and

PZ-DK223 (DSP) Cards

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 17

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-4 Time Slot, Group Number Assignment

Note 1: Extended Group No. can be used by FCH (PA-FCHA) card.

Note 2: A PIM consists of 384 physical ports (512 total ports).

00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

192 TS

16 32

TS/Physical ports

16 16

16 16 32

16 32

16 16

16 16 3232

192 TS

Slot No.

Number

Time Slots

(16)

PWR

(16)

PWR

00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

02 04 06 08 10

Slot No.

(25)

(24)

01 05 07 09 11

12 16 20

02 04 06 08 10 13 17

15 19 23

18 22

01 03 05 07 11 15 19

14 18 22

13 17 21

12 16

Group No.

Extended

Group No.

Time Slots are allocated for a PIM as shown below:

TS/SW ports

48 TS/SW

Group Numbers are allocated

for a PIM as follows:

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 18

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-5 Face Layout (Single IMG Configuration)

01 03 04 05 06 07 08

PWR #0 (PX-PW01)

PWR #1 (PX-PW01)

EMA (PX-PC00-A)

IOC (PX-IO00)

MISC

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PH-SW10 (TSW1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM (MGC)

BSCM

BASEU

FANU

CPR 0

Note 2

CPR 1

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

Note 1

Note 1: IOC card in slot 06 is optional.

Note 2: LANI cards in slots 0, 3 of CPR are optional.

Single IMG

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 19

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-6 Face Layout of Multiple IMG System (IMG0)

01 03 04 05 06 07 08

PWR #0 (PX-PW01)

PWR #1 (PX-PW01)

EMA (PX-PC00-A)

IOC (PX-IO00)

MISC/IOC

MISC

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM (MGC)

BSCM

BASEU

FANU

CPR 0

CPR 1

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

IMG 0

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: IOC card in slot 06 is optional.

Note 2: LANI cards in slots 0, 3 of CPR are optional.

Multiple IMG

07/31/02

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 20

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-7 Face Layout of Multiple IMG System (IMG1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

TSWM

BASEU

FANU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

IMG 1

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

MISC

PH-PC20 (DLKC)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-CK16/17 (PLO0)

PH-CK16/17 (PLO1)

ote: No circuit card is mounted in Slot 02 of TSWM.

Multiple IMG

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 21

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-8 Face Layout of Multiple IMG System (IMG2/3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

FANU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

IMG 2/3

Multiple IMG

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 22

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9.2 Circuit Card Locations

This section explains the main function of controlling circuit cards on a module basis. For more detailed infor-

mation on each card, please refer to the NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual.

Figure 2-9 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (MGC)

Note 3: PZ-GT25 is for Single IMG, PZ-GT26 is for Multiple IMG systems respectivery.

Table 2-4 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (MGC)

Slot No. Circuit Card Symbol Functions, Mounting Conditions

06, 07 PX-IO00 IOC

(Input/

Output

Controller)

This circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface (RS-232C),

which connects to external equipment such as the MAT, SMDR, and

MCI. One card is equipped with four I/O ports. A maximum port of the

system is up to eight ports (two cards).

08 PX-PC00-A EMA

(Emergency

Alarm

Controller)

This card detects the system event which might occur in the system, and

notify the information to the maintenance personnel. In addition, this card

has the following functions:

• Music-On-Hold sending function (Single IMG configuration only)

• Active/stand-by changeover function

CPR (Central Processor Rack) CPR consists of the following components.

• CPU Board: Includes the Main Processor Unit (MPU), flash ROM,

and 256 MB - Random Access Memory (RAM). (256 MB-RAM is

used for a system using FUSION features.) In addition, the board is

equipped with GT (Note 3) card, and LANI (PZ-PC19) card.

• DSP: Equipped with switches and 7-seg LEDs on the panel.

• Flash card

• PWR: Supplies the operating power to the LPM.

01 03 04 05 06 07 08

PWR #0 (PX-PW01)

PWR #1 (PX-PW01)

EMA (PX-PC00-A)

IOC (PX-IO00)

MISC/IOC Note 2

MISC

CPR#0

CPR#1

LPM (MGC)

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

0123456

Slot No.

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

0123456

Slot No.

Note 1

Note 1: LANI cards in slots 0, 3 of CPR are optional.

Note 2: IOC card in slot 06 is optional.

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 23

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-10 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM 0 (Single IMG Configuration Only)

Table 2-5 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM 0 (Single IMG Configuration Only)

Slot No. Circuit Card Symbol Functions, Mounting Conditions

01 PA-PW55-B PWR This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated

in the PIM.

03 PA-PW54-B DPWR This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated

in the PIM.

13, 14 PH-SW 10 TSW This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) INT, PLO,

MUX, and CFT. The TSW capacity is 2048 × 2048 time slots, and it

allows non-block switching for the maximum configuration. This card is

mounted within the PIM0 only.

00 0501 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 10 15 20 2319 2218171611 141312 21

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PH-SW10 (TSW1)

PIM0

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 24

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-11 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM

Table 2-6 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM

Slot No. Circuit Card Symbol Functions, Mounting Conditions

01 PA-PW55-B PWR This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated

in the PIM.

03 PA-PW54-B DPWR This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated

in the PIM.

13, 14 PH-PC36 MUX This circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or

trunks. Between the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/

trunk circuit, this card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-

multiplexing voice PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) information and

digital data information.

00 0501 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 10 15 20 2319 2218171611 141312 21

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 25

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-12 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM (Multiple IMG Configuration)

Table 2-7 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM (Multiple IMG Configuration)

Slot No. Circuit Card Symbol Functions, Mounting Conditions

00, 01 PH-PW14 PWRSW This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated

in the TSWM.

08, 09 PH-PC20 DLKC This circuit card provides the Attendant Consoles (ATTs) with

information such as ATT call termination/answer/release (abandoned

call) via the Data Link which is established in the TSW card. In addition,

station idle/busy information is sent to the ATTs via the same Data Link.

10, 11 PH-GT09 GT This circuit card permits the CPU to directly control the TSW, PLO,

DLKC, and MISC circuit cards via TSW I/O Bus and MISC I/O Bus.

12-19 PH-SW12 TSW This circuit card supplies the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT

function for the system. The TSW capacity is 8192 × 2048 TS (time slots)

for an IMG, and 4 cards achieves 8192 × 8192 TS switching for Multiple

IMG configuration.

21, 23 PH-CK16 PLO This circuit card, used with a digital interface circuit card, sets up network

synchronization. With this circuit card, the IPX Multiple IMG system can

be a clock subordinate office of the digital network.

21, 23 PH-CK17 PLO This circuit card, used with a digital interface circuit card, sets up network

synchronization. Since this circuit card provides high precision base

clock oscillator, the IPX Multiple IMG system can be a clock source

office of the digital network.

TSWM

00 0501 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 10 15 20 2319 2218171611 141312 21

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-SW12 (TSW1)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-SW12 (TSW1)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-CK16/17 (PLO1)

PH-CK16/17 (PLO0)

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 26

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9.3 Preparation of Trunking Diagram

Prepare the trunking diagram for the customer’s specification. Since there are different types of switching of-

fices (such as a single office, network offices, etc.) are involved, the trunking diagram must be prepared for each

of the customer’s specification.

9.4 Preparation of Module Group Face Layout And Port Accommodation Diagram

To mount circuit cards in the PBX, the company, which is supposed to install the IPX, should prepare the face

layout of module group and port accommodation diagram.

9.5 Preparation of Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets

Prepare the switch setting sheets for the circuit cards to be mounted in the PBX. Some of the circuit cards might

not be operated properly with the initial settings due to some reason such as not meet the customer’s specifica-

tion. Refer to the Circuit Card Manual describing the switch settings on Switch Setting Sheets and make sure

the switch setting entries.

Keep in mind that the card needs settings suitable for the surroundings.

10. INSTALLATION CABLES

The following installation cables are required for the PBX:

• DC Power Cable: For connections between the Rectifier and battery and be-

tween the Rectifier and the PBX

• AC Power Cable: For supplying AC source power to the Rectifier

• Ground Cable: Communication, Security and Line Protector grounding

• 25P Shielded Cable with CHAMP

• (Amphenol) connector at one end: For connections between the MDF and the PBX

• 25P Shielded Cable with CHAMP

• (Amphenol) connector at both ends: For connections between the MAT and the PBX, and be-

tween peripheral equipment and the PBX

• House Cable: For connections between terminals (telephone sets, etc.) and

the MDF

• Cables for C.O. lines and Tie Lines

• Others: For connections between Alarm Indicators and the MDF

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 27

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

10.1 AC Input, DC Power, And Ground Cables

1. For AC input cable, VCT (Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable) is to be used. However, if shielding is nec-

essary, as is the case when the AC input cable is to be installed in parallel with a low-voltage power cable,

etc., be sure to use VCT-S (Shielded Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable).

2. For the power receiving terminals of the PBX, -48 V and G terminals are provided in dual (A side and B

side). For two PIMs or less, the DC main power cable connects only to A side terminals. For three PIMs

or more, the cable is branched out. A side supplies power to LPM, PIM0 and PIM1, and B side to PIM2

and PIM3.

3. For the main ground cable, an IV or CV cable of more than 14 mm2 (6 AWG) is to be used. (See Figures

2-13 through 2-15).

As the security ground cable for the MAT and externally installed equipment, IV cable of 2 mm2 (14 AWG)

is to be used. For the ground cable for the line protector of the MDF, an IV cable of 14 mm2 (6 AWG) is to

be used.

Figure 2-13 DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (1- or 2-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

BATTERY

AC POWER

DISTRIBUTION

BOARD

VCT CABLE

BATTERY

CABLES RECTIFIER

POWER AND

GROUND CABLES

CV or IV

PBX

(For 1/2 PIM Configuration)

Earth Bar

AC SERVICE

OUTLET

-48V

MAT

MDF

GROUND

TERMINAL

GIV (G)

(ex. 6 AWG)

-48V

IV (BL)

IV (R)

-48V

BAB

Note: If the cover of CV Cable to be used is black, use the following clamp cover terminals so they can be

easily identified.

-48V: Black cover G: Red cover E: Green cover

CABLE SPECIFICATION

DC Main Power Cable Calculate the sectional area of cable referring to Figure 2-16.

Main Ground Cable More than 14 mm2 (6AWG)

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 28

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-14 DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (3- or 4-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

BATTERY

AC POWER

DISTRIBUTION

BOARD

VCT CABLE

BATTERY

CABLES RECTIFIER

POWER AND

GROUND CABLES

CV or IV

PBX

(For 3/4 PIM Configuration)

Earth Bar

AC SERVICE

OUTLET

-48V

MAT

MDF

GROUND

TERMINAL

GIV (G)

(ex. 6 AWG)

-48V

IV (BL)

IV (R)

-48V

BAB

Note 1: If the cover of CV Cable to be used is black, use the following clamp cover terminals so they can be

easily identified.

-48V: Black cover

G: Red cover

E: Green cover

Note 2: Extension jointing is usually performed with a T-type terminal for wires of the same size. Refer to Tables

2-8 through 2-10.

Note 3: It is recommended that each -48V lead of A and B be connected to a separate circuit breaker at the rec-

tifier.

CABLE SPECIFICATION

DC Main Power Cable Main Cable Calculate the sectional area of cable referring to

Figure 2-16.

Branch Cable IV cable: more than 14 mm2 (6 AWG)

Main Ground Cable More than 14 mm2 (6 AWG)

IV (G) (ex. 14 AWG)

IV (BL) IV (R)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 29

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-15 DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (Multiple IMG Configuration)

BATTERY

AC POWER

DISTRIBUTION

BOARD

VCT

BATTERY

CABLES

RECTIFIER

POWER AND GROUND CABLES

Earth Bar

AC SERVICE

OUTLET

MAT

MDF

GROUND

TERMINAL

IV (G)

(ex. 6AWG)

-48V

IV (BL)

IV (R)

-48V

IV (G)

IV (BL)

IV (R)

CABLES

(ex. 14AWG)

-48V

GND

FEBAB

-48V

GND

FEBAB

-48V

GND

FEBAB

DFB CV or IV

CV or IV

iv(g)

IV (R)

IV (BL)

IMG 3

IMG 2

IMG 1

IMG 0

NFB

-48V

GND

FEBAB

Note 1: Do not make a multiple connection across “A” terminal and “B” terminal of -48V. Likewise, do not

make a multiple connection across “A” terminal and “B” terminal of GND.

Note 2: It is recommended that each -48V lead from the PBX be connected to a separate circuit breaker at the

rectifier.

Note 3: When the lightning occurs, it might cause the difference of voltages between IMGs, and damage these

electric circuits. To keep from the differences of voltages in case, use one main power to connect the

IMGs.

The cables between connecting each of the terminal boards must be as short as possible.

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 30

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-8 Clamp Terminal Shape and Purpose

TYPE SHAPE PURPOSE REMARKS

End terminal

Branch or extend power cable

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 31

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Note: Selection of T-Type Clamp Terminal

The asterisk (*) in Table 2-9 indicates that an auxiliary conductor is necessary when using a main power

wire and a branch power wire of a thinner diameter, and the clamp terminal of the type indicated in the

selected columns.

Table 2-9 Selection of T-type Clamp Terminal

BRANCH

MAIN

14 AWG/

2 mm2

12 AWG/

3.5 mm2

10 AWG/

5.5 mm2

8 AWG/

8 mm2

6 AWG/

14 mm2CURRENT REMARKS

10 AWG *T-20 *T-20 *T-20 - - 51A

8 AWG *T-20 *T-20 *T-20 T-20 - 63 A

6 AWG T-20 T-20 T-20 T-26 T-44 90 A

3 AWG T-26 T-26 T-44 T-44 T-44 115A

2 AWG *T-44 T-44 T-44 T-44 T-44 139A

1 AWG *T-44 *T-44 T-44 T-66 T-60 162A

1ø *T-60 T-60 T-60 T-60 T-76 190A

2ø *T-76 T-76 T-76 T-76 T-76 217A

3ø *T-98 *T-98 *T-98 T-98 T-98 257A

4ø *T-122 *T-122 *T-122 *T-122 T-122 298A

250 mcm *T-154 *T-154 *T-154 T-154 T-154 344A

300 mcm *T-154 *T-190 *T-190 *T-190 T-190 395A

400 mcm *T-240 *T-240 *T-240 *T-240 T-240 439A

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 32

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-16 Calculation Method for Sectional Area

Table 2-10 Clamping Tool

*TOOL TYPE APPLICABLE CROSS

SECTION OF WIRE (mm2)ACCESSORIES REMARKS

No. 1 0.25 ~ 6.64 Manual type for A and C type terminal

No. 2 6.64 ~ 10.25

No. 9 6.64 ~ 42.42 Convex die 2 pieces Handling type hydraulic tool for A, C,

D, type terminal

No. 10 6.64 ~ 117.02 Convex die 4

Convex die 8

No. 11 6.64 ~ 117.02 Convex die 4

Convex die 8

Pedal type hydraulic tool for all

terminal types

No. 11 and No. 12 tools are used with

No. 13.

No. 12 117.02 ~ 325 Convex die 4

Convex die 4

No. 13 Rubber hose

No. 15 14 ~ 122 Convex die 7 pairs Handling type hydraulic tool for T

type terminal

No. 16 123 ~ 365 Convex die 5 pairs Use with No. 13 for T type terminal

S =

RECTIFIER

BATTERY PBX

0.018x(I1M1+I2M2)

I1M1I2M2

where,

S : Sectional area required (mm2)

I1 : Max. current passing between battery and rectifier

M1 : Two-way cable length between battery and rectifier

I2 : Max. current passing between rectifier and PBX

M2 : Two-way cable length between rectifier and PBX

V : Voltage drop

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 33

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

10.2 Cables Between The PBX And MDF

Regarding lines, trunks, and NCU (PFT), 25P shielded the PBX and the MDF are connected by using cables

with a CHAMP (Amphenol) connector at one end.

Table 2-11 shows the procedure for calculating the required number of cables. Figure 2-17 also shows an outline

of cable connections from the Module Group to the outside.

Table 2-11 Calculation of Number of Cables

CABLE NAME CALCULATION SUB TOTAL

LT Cable Number of PIMs × 12

NCU Cable Number of PFT Circuit Cards × 2

IPX EXALM CA-A One cable

ODT Cable Number of TLT circuit cards × 1

TOTAL

CHAPTER 2 ND-71548 (E)

Page 34

Issue 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Figure 2-17 Outline of Cables from Module Group to the Outside

CONNECTOR

DESIGNATION LEAD

DESIGNATION

CONNECTOR

DESIGNATIION LEAD

DESIGNATION

MDF

INST.

CABLE

INST.

LT-X Axx

LT-X Bxx

LT-X Axx LT-X Axx

LT-X Axx

INST.

CABLE

LT-X Bxx

LT-X Mxx

PFT

LT-X Bxx

PBX MDF

TO C.O.

DISTANT

PABX

NCU-X-AOx

NCU-X-BOx

NCU-X-Alx

NCU-X-Blx

NCU-X ROx

NCU-X Rlx

NCU-X Tlx

NCU-X TOx

TO ALARM

INDICATOR

ALM MJ

ALM E

ALM MN

IPX EXALM CA-A

COT

TLT

COT

SWITCHING

FACILITIES

Note 1: Legend : Male CONNECTOR : Female CONNECTOR.

Note 2: “ ” or “ ” in the above drawing indicates the CONNECTOR ended.

Cable to be connected between module connector and MDF.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 35

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. GENERAL

This chapter explains the procedures for installing the PBX, the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT),

Desk Consoles, and various types of terminal equipment (single line telephones, Dterms, Data Modules, etc.).

The procedures in this chapter are shown in Figure 3-1.

Before installing it, thoroughly read Section 2., “PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION”

and observe the precautions while performing the installation.

Figure 3-1 Scope of Installation Procedure

Paging/Announcement

Circuit Card

Procedures

Installation Preparation-Basic Procedures

Assembly and Installation of the Module

Group

Cabling within the Module Group

Mounting of Covers and

Post-Installation Procedures

Refer to Chapter 7.

RECT/

BATT

Power & Ground Cabling

Power Equipment Installation

SMDR Interface

Maintenance

Administration

Terminal

Desk Console

CHAMP Connector

Cable Running

Cable Termination

Installation of MDF

ALM IND./TAS IND./External

Key Box

Digital Interface

Single-line TEL

C.O./Tie Line

Installation of Peripheral

Equipment

Note: Work procedures are explained in detail in each NAP. Refer to the procedures by number (NAP-200-

XXX).

(NAP-200-001, 002, 003)

(NAP-200-004, 005)

(NAP-200-014)

(NAP-200-013)

(NAP-200-009)

(NAP-200-010, 012)

(NAP-200-008)

(NAP-200-006)

(NAP-200-018)

(NAP-200-017)

(NAP-200-016)

(NAP-200-007)

(NAP-200-015)

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 36

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION

2.1 Outline

1. Before beginning the installation, check to see if the installation requirements (grounding, the quantity and

kind of installation cables, etc.) are all present by referring to Chapter 2 of this manual.

2. For a standard installation, the system is installed on a free-access floor, so no explanations are provided

pertaining to cable racks and cable ducts.

3. The PBX is connected to the MDF by use of 25-pair shielded cables as the installation cables. Each of these

installation cables is grounded at the cable support assembly of the BASEU as shown below. By this ar-

rangement, noise radiation from each cable is prevented. For the installation method, refer to NAP-200-

013: “Cable Running from the Module Group to MDF, MAT, and SMDR.”

INST CABLE (25P AC-BUS CABLE)

LTX

PIM

BASEU

To MDF

: CHAMP Connector

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

LTX

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 37

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. As the cable to be run between the PBX and the Rectifier, use a CV cable (600 V Crosslinked Polyethylene

Insulated PVC Sheathed Cable) as the circumstance permits. Compared with an ordinary IV cable (600 V

PVC Insulated Cable), the CV cable is stronger because of its thicker cover. Thus, it is suitable to run along

the free-access floor where it is difficult to protect the cable from damage.

Also, for easy identification of different cables, use cables of different colors as follows:

• –48 V: Blue (White)

• GND: Red (Black)

•E: Green

Note: The color shown in a bracket is applicable to the UL Specification.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 38

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

The flowchart in Figure 3-2 shows the installation procedure. Each step is assigned a NAP number. NAPs NAP-

200-001 through NAP-200-018 follow Figure 3-2. These NAPs should be followed sequentially when perform-

ing the installation. Individual steps, such as installation of SMDR, can be performed independently by referring

to the corresponding NAP.

Figure 3-2 Installation Procedure

START

Installation Preparation

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

Unpacking and Inspection

Power Equipment Installation

MDF Installation Base Unit Installation

Mounting of Units and Modules

Cable Running

Cable Termination

Cable Termination and Cross

Connection

Power and Ground Cables

Circuit Cards Setting

Cable Connections

Circuit Cards

Desk Console Setting

MAT Setting

Connection of SMDR

Cleaning and Visual Check

END

Front Cable Connections between

(NAP-200-006)

(NAP-200-003)

(NAP-200-002)

(NAP-200-001)

(NAP-200-004)

(NAP-200-005)

(NAP-200-008)

(NAP-200-009)

(NAP-200-010)

(NAP-200-012)

(NAP-200-016)

(NAP-200-017)

(NAP-200-018)

(NAP-200-015)

(NAP-200-014)

(NAP-200-013)

(NAP-200-007)

Inter-Frame Cable Connections

(NAP-200-011)

(PBX->MDF/ATTCON/MAT/SMDR)

(MDF->C.O. Lines/Tie Lines/

Peripheral Equipment)

Connection

Internal Cable Connections

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 39

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the following work items:

• Confirmation of Equipment Locations

• Confirmation of Floor Layout

• Confirmation of Power and Ground Supply

• Check of Quantity of Equipment Packages

Note 1: Confirmation procedures are discussed in Chapter 2 of this manual.

Note 2: Be sure to correct any abnormal conditions encountered during installation preparation (missing hard-

ware, floor not level, etc.) before proceeding to the next step.

NAP-200-001

Sheet 1/2

Installation Preparation

Confirmation of Equipment

Locations

Environmental Confirmation of temperature and

humidity.

Floor Space

Floor Load

Equipment Room Floor surface

Wall

Ceiling

Lighting facilities

According to the floor layout,

confirm that the equipment

locations are appropriate.

Improper Locations:

• An open aisle or place where sprinklers are provided.

• A place where there is a water pipeline.

• A place where there is a pipeline generating heat and an

exhaust for such heat.

• A location near an exhaust port for corrosive fumes or gas

generated from a facility machine.

• A location near a copying machine or apparatus which dis-

sipates heat.

• A location where the switch will be exposed to direct sun-

light.

• A location near a kitchen facility, etc., from which vapor is

generated.

• A high EMI environment; for example, a location near an

elevator motor or X-ray equipment.

START

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 40

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-001

Sheet 2/2

Installation Preparation

Proper Locations:

• A dry and clean place.

• A place that is well ventilated.

• A sufficiently illuminated room. (200 lux at floor level).

• A location around which there are no obstructing objects,

thus allowing easy maintenance.

• A place where C.O. lines can be brought in, or local

cables can be brought up to the MDF easily.

• A place where communication and security ground can

be obtained as required

Confirmation of Power and

Ground Supply

Confirm AC voltage and current capacity.

Confirm that a Circuit Breaker (NFB) is provided

exclusively for the system.

Confirm that ground terminals are provided separately from

those of the power supply system.

Confirm that one main power is provided to connect the

IMG(s).

Check the Quantity of

Packages

Check the quantity of packages to see if there is a

discrepancy with the Packing List.

If any equipment is missing, report it to the supplier

immediately.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 41

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the procedures for marking, drilling and other necessary work when the PBX is to be installed

on a free-access floor by either one of the following three methods.

• Securing the PBX directly onto the floor

• Securing the PBX with the special stand

• Securing the PBX with the floor elevation

This NAP also explains the procedures for marking, leveling and drilling for MDF, Power Equipment, and Periph-

eral Equipment (See Section 4.)

Note: Kinds of Anchor Bolts

Various types of anchor bolts are available; the type of bolt to be used depends on the application. Sleeve

expansion-type anchor bolts are generally preferred for the PBX installation. Table 002-1 shows anchor

bolt specification.

* Pull out Strength = 1,900 Kg (4185 lb)

(Concrete Strength = more than 20, 580, 000 Pa (2984.871 PSI))

NAP-200-002

Sheet 1/8

Marketing, Leveling, and Drilling

Table 002-1 Specification of Anchor Bolts-Sleeve Expansion Type

SCREW SLEEVE

BOLT

LENGTH

SLEEVE

LENGTH DRILL

DIA.

DRILLING

DEPTH MAX. THICKNESS

OF ITEM TO BE

FIXED

APPLICATION COMPONENTS

mm inch mm inch mm inch

M10 Ø17.3 50 2 38 1.5 Ø17.5 50 2 15 mm/0.6 in For concrete Bolts,

Washers,

Nuts

70 2.8 58 2.3 70 2.8 Concrete + Mortar

(20 mm/0.8 in

thick)

80 3.1 68 2.7 80 3.1 Concrete + Mortar

(30 mm/1.2 in

thick)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 42

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. WHEN SECURING THE PBX DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR

NAP-200-002

Sheet 2/8

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

START

Marking Referring to Figure 002-1, mark the holes for the

anchor bolts of the base unit.

Drilling Drill holes at the locations marked for base unit.

Cutting of Free-Access Floor Referring to Figure 002-2, cut the free-access floor at

the marked cable locations by using a jigsaw.

Leveling Measure the level of floor surface of the free-access

floor.

When it is not level, adjust the support of the free-

access floor until it is level.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 43

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 002-1 Locations of Base Unit Securing Holes

NAP-200-002

Sheet 3/8

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

Multiple IMG Configuration

Single IMG Configuration

85(3.35")

55(2.17")

410(1'4.14")

550

(1'9.65")

(1.57")

520

(1'8.47") 40(1.57")

600

(1'11.62")

Unit: mm(inch)

85(3.35")

55(2.17")

410(1'4.14")

550

(1'9.65")

(1.57")

120

(4.72")

520

(1'8.47")

600

(1'11.62")

520

(1'8.47")

600

(1'11.62") 120

(4.72") 120

(4.72")

520

(1'8.47")

600

(1'11.62")

40(1.57")

Unit: mm(inch)

520

(1'8.47")

600

(1'11.62")

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 44

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 002-2 Cable Hole on a Free-Access or Computer Floor

NAP-200-002

Sheet 4/8

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

REAR

FRONT

PBX

CABLE HOLE

FREE-ACCESS FLOOR

Unit: mm(inch)

100(3.94")

115(4.53") 370

(1'2.57")

550

(1'9.65")

600

(1'11.62")

115(4.53")

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 45

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH THE SPECIAL STAND

NAP-200-002

Sheet 5/8

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

START

Marking and Drilling of Special

Stand

Drill the Special Stand for securing the PBX.

(See Figure 002-3.)

Marking, Drilling and Cutting of

Free-Access Floor

Mark, drill, and cut the free-access floor according to

the size of the special stand to be used.

Installing the Special Stand Secure the special stand onto the floor.

(See Figure 002-4.)

Level Check Check the level of the special stand. If necessary,

adjust the level by inserting spacers beneath the stand.

END

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 46

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 002-3 Example of Special Stand

Figure 002-4 Special Stand Installation Method

NAP-200-002

Sheet 6/8

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

410

(1'4.14")

(3.35")

(1.57")

520

(1'8.47")

600

(1'11.62")

HOLE FOR SECURING

BASE UNIT

Unit: mm(inch)

(1.57")

FRONT

PBX TOPU

PIM

LPM (MGC)

FREE-ACCESS

OR COMPUTER FLOOR

SPECIAL STAND

ANCHOR BOLT

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 47

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. WHEN SECURING PBX WITH FLOOR ELEVATIONS

Figure 002-5 Example of Elevation

NAP-200-002

Sheet 7/8

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

START

Installing the Floor Elevation Secure the Floor Elevation on the concrete floor.

(See Figure 002-5.)

Marking Mark the locations of the anchor bolt holes for the Base Unit.

(See Figure 002-1.)

Drilling Drill holes in the locations.

Cutting of Free-Access Floor Cut the Free-Access Floor with a jigsaw. (See Figure 002-2.)

END

HOLE FOR SECURING

BASEU

CONCRETE FLOOR

520

(1’8.47”)

410

(1’4.14”)

ANCHOR BOLT

ELEVATION

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 48

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. MARKING, LEVELING AND DRILLING FOR MDF, POWER EQUIPMENT, AND PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

NAP-200-002

Sheet 8/8

Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

START

Leveling Measure the level of floor surface and determine the reference

level.

Marking Mark the holes for securing

equipment

Power Equipment

MDF

Peripheral Equipment

Drilling Drill holes locations marked for power equipment, MDF, and

peripheral equipment.

Secure the anchor bolts to the floor.

(Embed nuts and sleeves)

Remove the anchor bolts temporarily.

(Remove anchor bolts and washers)

END

WALL

FLOOR

REFERENCE LEVEL

HIGHEST LEVEL

ROOM

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 49

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the procedure for unpacking and inspection.

Note 1: If any equipment is missing or damaged, report it to the supplier immediately.

Note 2: Save all packing materials and boxes so that they can be used to return damaged equipment to the supplier.

1. UNPACKING

NAP-200-003

Sheet 1/2

Unpacking and Inspection

START

Quantity check Check the quantity of packages received against the

Packing List.

Check for external damage Check the packaging for external damage.

Carry-In Carry the packages containing the Module Group into

the switching equipment room.

Unpacking Note 2 Module Group, Modules, and Units

Covers

Circuit Cards

ATTCON

Cables

END

CAUTION: Equipment may become damaged if

not handled properly during unpack-

ing and inspection. ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 50

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. INSPECTION

NAP-200-003

Sheet 2/2

Unpacking and Inspection

START

Visually Inspect Modules and Units Overall distortion.

Scratches or dents on the surface.

Distortion of shelves.

Cracks to connectors on the backplane.

Broken or bent pins on the backplane.

Circuit Cards

Provide protection from static

electricity.

Scratches and cracks.

Loose wires and parts.

Damage to card puller tabs.

Desk Console and MAT Scratches and dents on the body.

Damage to keys and lamps.

END

CAUTION: Equipment may become damaged

if not handled properly during

unpacking and inspection. ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 51

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the procedure for securing the Base Unit onto the floor directly or using special stand.

1. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR

Figure 004-1 Mounting the Base Unit on an Ordinary Floor

NAP-200-004

Sheet 1/3

Installation of the Base Unit

START

Securing the Base Unit Secure the Base Unit onto the floor as per Figure 004-1 and

004-2.

When the floor elevation is in use, secure the Base Unit by

referring to Figures 004-1 and 004-3.

Level Check Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the level

by inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

LOCK WASHER

BOLT

PLAIN WASHER

BASE

UNIT

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 52

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 004-2 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor

Figure 004-3 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor via Elevation

NAP-200-004

Sheet 2/3

Installation of the Base Unit

BOLT

BASE UNIT

FREE-ACCESS

FLOOR

FLAT WASHER

COMPRESSED PIPE

FLAT WASHER

CONCRETE

FLOOR

ANCHOR BOLT

Example: The floor elevation is higher

than 150 mm (5.9 inches).

FLOOR ELEVATION

BASE UNIT

FREE-ACCESS

FLOOR

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 53

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND

Figure 004-4 Setting the BASEU via Special Stand

NAP-200-004

Sheet 3/3

Installation of the Base Unit

START

Securing the Base Unit Secure the Base Unit onto the special stand as per Figure 004-4.

Level Check Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the level by

inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

LOCK WASHER

BOLT

PLAIN WASHER

BASEU

SPECIAL STAND

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 54

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. MOUNTING OF UNITS AND MODULES

Figure 005-1 Procedure for Mounting Units and Modules

NAP-200-005

Sheet 1/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

START

END

Mounting of Modules, FAN

BOX and TOPU

Mount modules, FAN BOX and TOPU for each cabinet, by

referring to the Figure 005-1.

(TOPU)

Tighten these screws.

Do the same at the rear

side, too.

(PIM3)

Tighten these screws.

Do the same at the rear

side, too.

(PIM2)

Tighten these screws.

Do the same at the rear

side, too.

(FAN BOX)

Tighten these screws.

Do the same at the rear

side, too.

(PIM1)

Tighten these screws.

Do the same at the rear

side, too.

(PIM0)

(LPM (MGC))

Note

Note: FAN Unit (FANU) is

mounted on the TOPU,

or inside the FAN

BOX, and LPM

(MGC). For detailed

procedures, refer to

Section 2 of this NAP.

BSCM

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 55

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. INSTALLATION OF FANU

Location of FANU (PZ-M369 and three electronic FANs) is shown in Figure 005-2. Depending on your system con-

figuration, mount the FANU in the proper position.

Figure 005-2 Locations of FANU

NAP-200-005

Sheet 2/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

NEC

TOPU

NEC

TOPU

FAN BOX

located here.

FANU is

FRONT VIEW

The mounting location of FANU differs depending on the module configuration of each cabinet. When the

cabinet consists of a total of two PIMS or fewer, the FANU is mounted on the TOPU. Otherwise, the FANU

is housed in the dedicated FAN BOX in the center of the cabinet.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 56

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. PROCEDURE FOR FANU ON THE TOPU

When any IMG is configured by two PIMs or less, the FANU is mounted as shown in Figure 005-3. Because the

FANU is already mounted on the TOPU of the cabinet, perform STEP 4 through STEP 7 only, excepting a special

case (STEP 1 through STEP 3 are not required in the normal cases).

STEP 1: Referring to Figure 005-3, mount the three FANs onto the FAN Mounting Plate. Then, fasten every

four screws.

STEP 2: Accommodate the FAN Mounting Plate (tipped with three FANs) onto the TOPU.

Then, tighten the four screws (refer to Figure 005-3).

STEP 3: Mount the PZ-M369 onto the TOPU. Then, fasten the two screws (also refer to Figure 005-3).

Figure 005-3 Mounting of FANU (on TOPU)

NAP-200-005

Sheet 3/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

TOPU

PZ-M369

(TALM)

FAN Mounting Plate

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 57

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

STEP 4: Fix a FAN fuse (5.0A) onto the PZ-M369.

Figure 005-4 Attachment of FAN Fuse (PZ-M369)

STEP 5: Connect the FAN cables as shown in Figure 005-5 and Figure 005-6.

STEP 6: Lastly, attach the Top Cover onto the TOPU of the cabinet. Then, fasten the four screws (refer to Fig-

ure 005-7).

Note: The procedures, STEP 4 through STEP 6, must be performed at each PBX cabinet adopting 1-PIM or 2-

PIM configuration.

NAP-200-005

Sheet 4/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

TH2 FAN TALM1 TALM0

TH1 TH0 FC0 FC1 FC2

PZ-M369

OFF

Auto

Fasten a FAN fuse (5.0 A) here.

PWR SWNote

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Note: Heat run test of the FANU is shown in Chapter 4, ”SYSTEM STARTUP”. Therefore, keep the PWR SW

key to the center position (= OFF), still at this time.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 58

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-5 Cable Connections for FANU on TOPU

NAP-200-005

Sheet 5/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

PBX

NEC

...

TH0 TH1TH2 FAN FC0 FC1 FC2 TALM0

FAN

Note 1

Note 2

TALM

PZ-M369

THM

TOPU

FANU

TOPU (Top View)

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Note 1: For details on the “FAN” connector (PIM backplane), refer to Figure 005-6.

Note 2: For details on the “TALM” connector (TOPU panel), refer to Figure 005-3.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 59

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-6 Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (TOPU-PIM)

NAP-200-005

Sheet 6/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

PBX

TOPU

PIM

(FAN)

TALM1 TALM0

TH1 TH0 FC0 FC1 FC2

FAN

PZ-M369

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

TH2

OFF

Auto

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 60

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-7 Attachment of the Top Cover

NAP-200-005

Sheet 7/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

NEC

Top Cove

TOPU

PIM

Mount the Top Cover onto the TOPU.

Then, fasten the four screws by using

the Phillips screwdriver.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 61

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. PROCEDURE FOR FANU IN THE FAN BOX

When any IMG is configured by 3 or 4 PIMs, the FANU must be accommodated within the FAN BOX in the center

of the cabinet. Because the FANU is originally mounted on the TOPU as shown in Figure 005-3, relocate the FANU

into the dedicated FAN BOX as per the STEPs below:

STEP 1: Referring to Figure 005-3, remove the FANU from the TOPU.

• Remove the two screws fastening the PZ-M369. Then, lift away the PZ-M369.

• Remove the four screws fastening the FAN Mounting Plate (tipped with three FANs).

• Then, lift away the FAN Mounting Plate.

Note: Retain the removed screws.

STEP 2: Fasten the PZ-M369 and FAN Mounting Plate onto the FAN BOX connection bar (refer to Figure

005-8). Use two screws (for PZ-M369) and four screws (for FAN Mounting Plate) retained in STEP

STEP 3: Connect the FAN cables for “FC0,” “FC1” and “FC2” connectors on the PZ-M369. Refer to Figure

005-9.

STEP 4: Insert the FANU, prepared in STEP 1 through STEP 3, into the FAN BOX. Then, secure the FANU

with the two screws (refer to Figure 005-8).

NAP-200-005

Sheet 8/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 62

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-8 Relocation of FANU and Insertion into FAN BOX

NAP-200-005

Sheet 9/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

Screws for FAN Mounting Plate

Screws for PZ-M369

FAN BOX connection bar

FAN BOX

Note

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Note: Before inserting the FANU into the FAN BOX, connect the FAN cables for “FC0,” “FC1,” and “FC2”

connectors on the PZ-M369. Refer to Figure 005-9.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 63

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-9 FAN Cable Connections for FC0/FC1/FC2 Connectors

NAP-200-005

Sheet 10/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

FC0 FC1 FC2

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

FAN0 FAN1 FAN2

PZ-M369

Before installing the FANU into the FAN BOX, connect FAN cables as shown below.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 64

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

STEP 5: Fix a FAN fuse (5.0A) onto the PZ-M369 by referring to Figure 005-4.

STEP 6: Connect the remaining FAN cables as per Figure 005-10 and Figure 005-11.

STEP 7: Lastly, attach the Top Cover onto the TOPU of the cabinet. Then, fasten the four screws (refer to Fig-

ure 005-7).

Note: The procedures, STEP 1 through STEP 7, must be performed at each PBX cabinet adopting 3-PIM or 4-

PIM configurations.

NAP-200-005

Sheet 11/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 65

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-10 Cable Connections for FANU in FAN BOX

NAP-200-005

Sheet 12/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

FAN BOX

PZ-M369

TH0TH1TH2FAN TALM0

Note 2

TALM

THM

TOPU (Top View)

Note 1

PZ-M369 (Front View)

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

PBX

TOPU

NEC

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

(

)

(

)(

)

Note 1: For details on the “FAN” connector (PIM backplane), refer to Figure 005-11.

Note 2: For details on the “TALM” connector (TOPU), refer to Figure 005-3.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 66

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-11 Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (FAN BOX-PIM)

NAP-200-005

Sheet 13/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

(FAN)

FAN BOX

PBX

FAN power cable

(FAN)

FAN BOX

TH2 TALM1 TALM0

TH1 TH0 FC0 FC1 FC2

OFF

Auto

FAN

PZ-M369

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 67

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

5. ATTACHING THE ADDITIONAL NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU) TO THE BASEU

The following flowchart shows the procedure for attaching the Additional Noise Filter Unit (NFILU) to the BASEU

of the PBX. This work should be performed when the module stack contains 3 or 4 PIMs.

NAP-200-005

Sheet 14/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

STAR

Referring to Figure 005-12 and Figure 005-13, insert the NFILU to BASEU and attach the NFILU with

two screws.

Referring to Figure 005-14, connect the cables equipped with NFILU to the terminals on the BASEU.

END

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 68

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-12 Insertion of NFILU

Figure 005-13 Attaching of NFILU

NAP-200-005

Sheet 15/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU)

SCREW

BASEU

SCREW

SCREWS

BASEU

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 69

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 005-14 Cabling Diagram of NFILU

NAP-200-005

Sheet 16/18

Mounting of Units and Modules

(-48VB)

(GB0)

(G)

(-48V)

(PZ-M371)

Additional

Noise Filter

Unit (NFILU)

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

(PZ-M377)

FRONT

Already Attached

Noise Filter Unit

BASEU

(GB1)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 70

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the procedures for installing the power equipment.

Note: The Circuit Breaker (NFB) for the Rectifier's DC output must remain OFF.

NAP-200-006

Sheet 1/1

Installation of Power Equipment

START

Install the power equipment at the predetermined location using anchor bolts, etc. Install the framework

for the batteries to be used for backup. Secure the framework using anchor bolts, etc.

Check the cabling at the primary and secondary sides of the power equipment, and the cabling to the

batteries

Confirm that the specifications of the customer-installed AC PDB (NFB capacity, voltage, phase, etc.)

conform to the specifications of the Rectifier.

Confirm that the proper communication ground is available.

Connect the input power cable and grounding cable to the rectifier.

Supply electrolyte to each battery as per the specifications of the battery.

Charge the batteries after verifying that the rectifier is operating normally.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 71

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the procedures for installing the MDF.

NAP-200-007

Sheet 1/1

Installation of the MDF

START

Install the MDF at the predetermined location on the floor or wall. Be sure to check the quantity of

accessory items such as arresters, block terminals, etc.

Install the MDF, taking into consideration the locations of lead-in holes for Local Cable, C.O. lines, Tie

Lines, and Cable Running Routes.

MDF Line Protector Ground must be separated from the Communication Ground connected to the

rectifier.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 72

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the following work items.

• Connection of Power and Ground Cables

• Connection of DC-DC Converter for Telephone sets equipped with Message Waiting Lamps

• End Jointing of Power and Ground Cables

• Branching of Power Cables

1. CONNECTION OF THE POWER AND GROUND CABLES

CAUTION: Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment.

Never operate telecommunication equipment with grounding conductor disconnected.

NAP-200-008

Sheet 1/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

Cable Running Run the power and ground cables per

Figure 008-1 and Figure 008-3.

Running of power and ground cables to the

Power Receiving Terminals in the BASEU

An example of cable running on a free access or

computer floor is shown in Figure 008-1.

Confirming that the Circuit Breaker (NFB) of the Rectifier is OFF.

Connection of the power and ground cables Connect the power and ground cables to the

Power Receiving Terminals on the BASEU per

Figure 008-3.

Connect the power and ground cables to the

output terminals of the Rectifier.

Check after cable connections Using a continuity tester, confirm that the -48 V

power cable is not shorting to the G power cable

or FE ground cable.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 73

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-1 Detail of Cable Running (Single IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-008

Sheet 2/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

POWER AND GROUND CABLES

POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL

PBX

PIM

REAR LPM

T-BRANCH CONNECTION

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 74

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-2 Detail of Cable Running (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-008

Sheet 3/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

REAR

REAR LPM

IMG3

REAR TSWM

IMG2

IMG1

IMG0

POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL

T-BRANCH CONNECTION

POWER AND GROUND CABLES

MAIN CABLE

DUMMY

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 75

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-3 Connection of Power and Ground Cables to Power Receiving Terminal

NAP-200-008

Sheet 4/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Note 1: For 1/2 PIM configuration, connect the cable only to the A terminal.

Note 2: An example of End Jointing (using A Type-Clamp terminal) is explained in Section 3 of this NAP.

+80V:Terminal

-48V:B Terminal

G:B Terminal

-48V:A Terminal

G:A Terminal

FE Terminal

POWER AND GROUND CABLES

POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL

REAR VIEW

BASEU

PIM0

LPR (MGC)

Note 1

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 76

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. CONNECTION OF DC-DC CONVERTER FOR TELEPHONE SETS EQUIPPED WITH MESSAGE WAITING

LAMPS

NAP-200-008

Sheet 5/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

START

Cable Running Referring to Figure 008-4, run the power and

ground cables.

Removal of shorting piece and cable

connection

Referring to Figure 008-5, remove the shorting

piece from the +80 V connector of PZ-M371 card,

and then connect the cable provided on the +80 V

Power Receiving Terminal Block to the +80 V

connector.

Confirming that the Circuit Breaker (NFB) of the Rectifier is OFF.

Connection of Power and Ground Cables Referring to Figures 008-4 and 008-5, connect the

power and ground cable to each terminal of the

equipment.

Check after cable connections Using a continuity tester, confirm that the –48 V

and +80 V power cable are not short-circuiting with

the G power cable or FE ground cables.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 77

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-4 Example Connection Diagram-DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamps

NAP-200-008

Sheet 6/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

Note: The current capacity of the DC-DC Converter is calculated by multiplying the (current capacity of

the message waiting lamp) by the number of telephone sets.

PBX

IV(WHITE)

+80V

DC-DC

CONVERTER

OUTPUT

INPUT

G+80V

–48V

IV (BL)

IV (R)

IV (G)

TO RECTIFIER

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 78

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-5 Removal of Shorting Piece and Cable Connection

NAP-200-008

Sheet 7/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

BASEU

Power Receiving Terminal Block

Remove the shorting piece

Connect the Cable to the +80V Connector of PZ-M371 card

PZ-M371

+80V

Power Cable

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 79

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. END JOINTING OF POWER AND GROUND CABLES

NAP-200-008

Sheet 8/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

START

Stripping of Insulation Sheath Strip the wire to exceed the length of the terminal body

by 1 - 2 mm (1/8 inch).

Clamping Referring to Figure 008-6, place the terminal body on

the die with the soldered part facing upward.

Referring to Figure 008-7, insert the stripped wire into

the terminal body up to the insulation-sheath edge, and

clamp the terminal.

Wipe the terminal with a dry cloth.

END

WIRE SHEATH

CONDUCTOR

CLAMP TERMINAL

1/8 inch (1 - 2 mm)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 80

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-6 Placing the Clamp Terminal on the Die

Figure 008-7 Clamping Method

NAP-200-008

Sheet 9/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

CONVEX DIE

SOLDERED PART

TERMINAL

CONCAVE DIE

1/8 inch (1 - 2mm)

CONVEX DIE

INSULATION SHEATH

TERMINAL

CONCAVE DIE

SOLDERED PART

CLAMPED PORTION

CONDUCTOR

A-A'

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 81

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. BRANCHING OF POWER CABLES

NAP-200-008

Sheet 10/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

START

Stripping Main and Branch Cable Referring to Figure 008-8, strip insulation coating

with an electrician’s knife. Avoid damage to the

conductor during the stripping process.

Inserting of Cables into Terminal Insert the stripped main wire and branch wire into the

terminal as shown in Figure 008-9.

Clamping for Branch Jointing Place T-Type terminal on the die of the clamping

tool, T-20 - T-44 terminals should be placed on the

center of the die.

T-60 - T-365 terminals should be placed on the die in

such a way that the terminal will be pressed on the

part marked with the roulette.

Proceed with the operation of the clamping tool

referring to Figure 008-10.

Clean the terminal with a dry cloth.

Taping and Covering Referring to Figures 008-11 and 008-12, put an

installation cover over the clamped portion, after

taping with installation tape.

END

3 ROULLETTES

T-154-T-365

NO ROULLETTE

T-20-T-44

2 ROULLETTES

T-60-T-122

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 82

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-8 Stripped Length of Main and Branch Cable

NAP-200-008

Sheet 11/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

Table 008-1 Stripped Length

APPLICABLE TERMINAL STRIPPED MAIN-WIRE LENGTH I1

[inch (mm)]

STRIPPED MAIN-WIRE LENGTH I2

[inch (mm)]

T-20 Approx. 1.2 (28) Approx. 1.0 (24)

T-26 1.3 (32) 1.2 (28)

T-44 1.5 (37) 1.3 (33)

T-60 1.6 (40) 1.5 (36)

T-76 1.7 (42) 1.6 (39)

T-98 1.8 (44) 1.7 (41)

T-122 1.7–1.9 (43–46) 1.6–1.7 (40–43)

T-154 2.0 (49) 1.9 (46)

T-190 2.3 (57) 2.2 (54)

T-240 2.5 (63) 2.4 (60)

T-288 2.8 (69) 2.6 (66)

T-365 3.0 (75) 2.9 (72)

T-98

Sum of the cross sections of the main and branching, or the main and extension cables.

Type of clamp terminal (T type)

I 1

MAIN CABLE

CONDUCTOR

BRANCH CABLE

I 2

T TYPE

CLAMP-

TERMINAL

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 83

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-9 Inserting of Cables into Terminal

Figure 008-10 Clamping for Branch Jointing

NAP-200-008

Sheet 12/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

1/8 inch (1 - 2 mm)

BRANCH

CABLE

MAIN CABLE

BEND PRIOR TO INSERTION

T TYPE

TERMINAL

Note: • Prevent the wires from slipping out of the clamp ter-

minal by holding them firmly.

• Check the indication of the pressure regulator.

• Operate the pressure release lever to release the

wires from the die.

CLAMPED PORTION

DIE

T TYPE

TERMINAL

CONDUCTOR

(MAIN AND

BRANCH CABLE)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 84

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 008-11 Taping

Figure 008-12 Covering

NAP-200-008

Sheet 13/13

Connection of Power and Ground

Cables from the Power Equipment

Note: Taping should be done in two rounds with the tape

overlapping half the tape width.

INSULATION TAPE

4-1.2 in (10 - 30 mm) More than.4 in (10 mm)

INSULATION COVER

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 85

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the following work items:

• Extraction of Mounted Circuit Cards

• Mounting of Circuit Cards

• Setting of Switch Positions on Circuit Cards

• Installation of CPR

1. PRECAUTIONS

1.1. Protection Against Static Electricity

When setting switches on circuit cards, use a Portable Field Service Grounding Kit in order to prevent damage

to static-sensitive components.

Example: 3M Model 8012, consists of:

•2 × 2 VELOSTAT ® Work Mat

• 15 ft. (4.5 m) Ground Cord

• CHARGE-GUARD ® Wrist Strap with alligator clip

Before handling any circuit cards, first spread out the work mat, then connect the ground cord to the frame or

other ground source.

If a CHARGE-GUARD wrist strap is to be used, connect the wrist strap to the frame or other ground using the

provided cable.

1.2. Handling Circuit Cards

Whenever possible, do not handle circuit cards with bare hands.

The only portion of the card that can be touched is its edge. Do not touch the surface or the mounted components.

Doing so may damage the card.

Handle circuit cards carefully. Never bang or drop them.

1.3. Mounting or Removing Circuit Cards when the System Is in Operation

Never mount or remove a circuit card without first setting its MBR and/or MB switch to the UP position.

NAP-200-009

Sheet 1/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 86

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. EXTRACTION OF MOUNTED CIRCUIT CARDS

NAP-200-009

Sheet 2/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

START

Removing the Card Stopper Referring to Figure 009-1, remove the card stopper

from the module.

Extracting Circuit Cards Referring to Figure 009-2, pull the card puller tabs

in the direction indicated by the arrow. The card

will release from the connector and can then be

removed.

Pull the card out about 50 mm (2 inches) from the

edge of the module so that it does not contact the

backplane connector.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 87

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 009-1 Removal of Card Stopper

NAP-200-009

Sheet 3/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CARD STOPPER

PAN HEAD SCREW (M3, 8mm (.3 inches) length)

SPRING WASHER (M3)

PLAIN WASHER (M3)

Remove the card stopper from the

module using a phillips-head screwdriver.

(PL-C.P.l. MS3815BF)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 88

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS

NAP-200-009

Sheet 4/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

START

Unpacking the Circuit Cards Unpack each circuit card and remove it from its

polyethylene bag.

Cleaning the connector portion of

the Circuit Cards

Wipe the connector portion clean using a soft cloth

moistened with pure trichloroethylene or methanol

(medical alcohol). Make sure that no lint or dust

remains on the connector after cleaning.

Circuit cards which are already mounted should be

extracted and cleaned as per the above instructions.

Confirming the mounting positions of

the Circuit Cards

Confirm the mounting position of each circuit card

by referring to the Module Face Layout.

Confirm that the color code of the card puller tab

coincides with that of the card mounting slot.

Confirm the Slot No. on the Module. Slot numbers

are indicated at the bottom of each module, and

range from 00 to 23.

Inserting the cards into the Module Partially insert the circuit card into the module,

making sure that it is correctly aligned at the top and

bottom. The card should extend about two inches

from the module, and must not contact the backplane

connector (see Figure 009-3).

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 89

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. SETTING OF SWITCH POSITIONS ON CIRCUIT CARDS

NAP-200-009

Sheet 5/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

START

Extracting the Circuit Cards from the

Module

Extract one circuit card requiring switch setting from

the module.

Place the extracted card onto the anti-static sheet.

Performing switch setting Set the required switches according to the Switch

Setting Sheets in the Circuit Card Manual.

Mounting of Circuit Cards After the switches have been set, partially insert the

card in the module. The card should extend about 50

mm (2 inches) from the module, and must not contact

the backplane connector. Refer to Figure 009-3.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 90

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009

Sheet 6/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Figure 009-3 Circuit Card Mounting (Partial Insertion)

Figure 009-2 Extraction of Circuit Cards

About 50 mm

(2 inches)

About 50 mm

(2 inches)

CIRCUIT

CARDS

CARD

PULLER

TAB

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 91

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

5. INSTALLATION OF CPR

This section explains how to install the CPR into the LPM (MGC). Perform the following procedure for each CPR.

STEP 1: Remove the eight screws from the top cover and the two screws from the front panel, then lift away

the top cover.

STEP 2: Disconnect the SW PWR CA-A from PWR SW connector.

Figure 009-4 Removal of Top Cover

STEP 3: Remove the two screws from the front panel, then detach the front panel.

Figure 009-5 Removal of Front Panel

NAP-200-009

Sheet 7/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

STEP 2

STEP 1

SLOT No.

PWR SW

LOAD CPUOPE

PMOPE

WDT

123456

PWR SW

Front Panel

Top Cover

CPR

SW PWR CA-A

SLOT No.

PWR SW

LOAD CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

123456

CPR

MISC CA-A

PWRSW

front panel

lever

LED

screws

PassthetipofMBswitchthrough

thefrontpanellever.

LED

Front Panel

hole

DonotbendtheLEDwhenattaching

thefrontpanel.PasstheLEDthrough

theholeonthefrontpanel.

Note 1:

Note 1

Note 2:

Note 2

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 92

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

STEP 4: Insert the ISAGT (PZ-GT25/26) card into slot 6 as shown below.

Figure 009-6 Insertion of the ISAGT card (in slot 6)

STEP 5: Connect the following cables to the connectors on the inserted ISAGT card. For more information,

refer to Figure 9-15.

Figure 009-7 Cable Connections to the ISAGT card

NAP-200-009

Sheet 8/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPR

PWRSW

FAN

PWRGD

ISAGT

Note

MISC CA-A

optional

slot 6 (ISA) : PZ-GT25/26

slot 3 (PCI) : PZ-PC19

slot 0 (PCI) : PZ-PC19

Note: This figure shows PZ-GT25 as an example.

• MISC CA-A: CONN (upper connector on the ISAGT)

• 50AL FLT CA-A: CONN (lower connector on the ISAGT)

• PWR GD CA-A: PWRGD (PZ-IO31) <=> PWG (ISAGT)

ISAGT

Note

ISAGT

(PZ-GT25)

MISC CA-A

PWR GD CA-A

50AL FLT CA-A

to KEY B

to KEY A

Note: This figure shows PZ-GT25 as an example.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 93

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

STEP 6: Insert the optional LANI card(s) when FCCS is used via LAN.

Note: FCCS stands for Fusion Call Control Signaling.

Figure 009-8 Insertion of the LANI card (in slot 0/3)

STEP 7: Remove the blind covers of the slots in which ISAGT/LANI card to be used.

Figure 009-9 Removal of Blind Covers

NAP-200-009

Sheet 9/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPR

PWG

PWRSW

to KEY A

slot 0

slot 3

to KEY B

FAN

PWRGD

PZ-IO31

ISAGT

LANI

(PZ-PC19)

LANI

(PZ-PC19)

MISC CA-A

50AL FLT CA-A

PWR GD CA-A

blind cover

SLOT No.

PWR SW

LOAD CPUOPE

PMOPE

WDT

123456

Front Panel

This is an example for installing two LANI cards.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 94

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

STEP 8: Attach the Front Panel again by fastening the removed two screws at the lower

side of the front panel.

STEP 9: Connect SW PWR CA-A cable again.

STEP 10: Connect 50AL FLT CA-A to KEYA and KEYB connectors on PZ-DK237.

Figure 009-10 Cable Connections to the ISAGT card

STEP 11: Attach the top cover again by using the removed ten screws.

Figure 009-11 Attaching the Top Cover

NAP-200-009

Sheet 10/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPR

Front Panel

PZ-DK237

KEYB

KEYA

PWRSW

SLOT No.

PWR SW

LOAD CPUOPE

PMOPE

WDT

123456

SW PWR CA-A 50AL FLT CA-A

Tie-Wrap

Note:Secureallcablesatthetie-wrapsothattheymaynotblockflowofair.

Note

STEP 8

STEP 9

STEP 10

Front Panel

SLOT No.

PWR SW

LOAD CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

123456

Top Cove

CPR

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 95

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

STEP 12: Turn ON the MBR key on the DSP of the CPR.

Figure 009-12 Turning ON the MBR key

STEP 13: Insert the CPR into the LPM so that three connectors may be firmly plugged into the connectors on

the backplane.

STEP 14: Fasten the CPR to the LPM (MGC) using the four screws

Figure 009-13 Accommodation of CPR into LPM (MGC)

NAP-200-009

Sheet 11/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

SLOT No. 0

LOAD CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

123456

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

MBR

CPR

STEP 12

connectors

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

LPM (MGC)

PIM 0

LPM (MGC)

PIM 0

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

STEP 13

STEP 14

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

CPR

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 96

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Note 1: PZ-GT25 is for Single IMG, PZ-GT26 is for Multiple IMG.

Note 2: FCCS stands for Fusion Call Control Signaling.

Figure 009-14 Connectors on the Front Panel and ISAGT card

NAP-200-009

Sheet 12/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

Table 009-1 ISAGT and LANI Mounting Slots

Circuit Card Slot No. Bus Type Reference

ISAGT (PZ-GT25/26)

Note1 6ISARequired

LANI (PZ-PC19) 0 PCI Optional (used for FCCS Link Note2 )

LANI (PZ-PC19) 3 PCI Optional (used for FCCS Link <dual>)

Table 009-2 Cable Connections to the ISAGT card

No. CABLE NAME FROM TO Reference

1 50AL FLT CA-A KEYA/KEYB CONN (lower) KEY A and KEY B are on PZ-DK237.

2 MISC CA-A M0/M1 CONN (upper)

3 PWR GD CA-A PWRGD PWRG PWRGD is on PZ-IO31 card.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

LOAD

LCON

LAN

0123456

CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

DSP (PZ-DK237)

Front Panel

LANI (PZ-PC19) ISAGT (PZ-GT25/26)

LAN (

RJ45 connector

)

LCON

FRONT VIEW

KEYA

KEYB

POWER

Flash Card

SLOT NO.

Note

PZ-GT25/26

Front side

Rear side PWG

LCON

CONN (Lower): Connect

"50AL FLT CA-A" to this connector.

"PWR GD CA-A"

CONN (Upper): Connect

"MISC CA-A" to this connector.

to PWRGD on

PZ-IO31

ISAGT (PZ-GT25/26)

Note: This figure shows PZ-GT25 as an example.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 97

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 009-15 Cable Connection Diagram for CPR

NAP-200-009

Sheet 13/13

Setting of Switch Positions and

Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

FAN

40AL FLT CA-A

PZ-DK237

PZ-IO31

FRONT

REAR

KEY A

KEY B

POWER

PZ-GT25/PZ-GT26

PWG

SW PWR CA-A

IN PWR CA-A

FAN PWR CA-A

MISC CA-A

FAN PWR CA-A

CPR PWR CA-A

50AL FLT CA-A

MISC CA-A

(upper connector)

50AL FLT CA-A

(lower connector)

PWRSW

FAN

PWRGD

CPWRA

CPWRB

IDE

PWR GD CA-A

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 98

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains how to run the following internal cables between Modules.

NAP-200-010

Sheet 1/64

Internal Cable Connections

START

Confirming connector locations Referring to Figures 010-1 through 010-4,

confirm the locations of the connectors into

which the internal cables are inserted.

Connection of FANU cables Referring to the figures listed in Figures 010-4

through 010-9, connect FANU cables.

Connection of Internal Power Cables Referring to the figures shown in Figures 010-5

through 010-12, connect internal power cables.

Connection of Internal Bus Cables Referring to figures shown in Figures 010-22

through 010-29, connect internal bus cables.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 99

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Since cable connections vary depending on the system configuration, which includes how many Port Interface Mod-

ules (PIMs) are accommodated in the system or whether redundancy is taken into account as to the CPU. Before

starting cable connections, find your system in “Quick Reference Table.” When you find your system in the table,

open the related pages, on which necessary information is provided, and then set about the cable connections.

NAP-200-010

Sheet 2/64

Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table

SYSTEM TYPE KIND OF CABLE FRAME NAME FIGURE TABLE

Single IMG Configuration

Power Cable IMG0 010-5 ~

010-12 010-2 ~ 010-5

Internal Cable IMG0 010-22 ~

010-29

010-15 ~

010-18

Multiple IMG Configuration

Power Cable IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-14 010-7

Internal Cable IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-31 010-20

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

Power Cable IMG0 011-13 010-6

IMG1 010-15 010-8

Internal Cable IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-32 010-21

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

PIM0

LPM

IMG

PIM2

PIM3

PIM1

TOPU

FAN U

BASEU

PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0

IMG1

TSWM

PIM2

PIM3

PIM1 TOPU

BASEU

FANU

TOPU

BASEU

5-PIM System

PIM0

LPM

IMG0

IMG1

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

PIM1

BASEU

TOPU

FANU TOPU

BASEU

6-PIM System

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 100

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 3/64

Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (Continued)

SYSTEM TYPE KIND OF CABLE FRAME NAME FIGURE TABLE

Power Cable IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-16 010-9

Internal Cable IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-33 010-22

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

Power Cable IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

Internal Cable IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

Power Cable

IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-18 010-11

Internal Cable IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-3 011-3

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

PIM1 PIM1

PIM2

IMG1

TOPU

BASEU

FANU

BASEU

TOPU

7-PIM System

PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

PIM1 PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

TOPU

BASEU

FANU FA NU

BASEU

TOPU

8-PIM System

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

DUMMY

PIM1 PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

IMG2

BASEU

TOPU

FANU

BASEU BASEU

TOPU

FANU

9-PIM System

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 101

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 4/64

Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (Continued)

SYSTEM TYPE KIND OF CABLE FRAME NAME FIGURE TABLE

Power Cable

IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-19 010-12

Internal Cable

IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

IMG2 010-35 -

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-4 011-4

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

Power Cable

IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-20 010-13

Internal Cable

IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

IMG2 010-36 -

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-5 011-5

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

DUMMY

PIM1 PIM1

PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

IMG2

10-PIM System

BASEU

TOPU

FANU FANU TOPU

TOPU

BASEU BASEU

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

DUMMY

PIM1 PIM1

PIM1

PIM2 PIM2

PIM3 IMG2

11-PIM System

BASEU

TOPU

FANU FA NU FANU

BASEUBASEU

TOPU

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 102

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 5/64

Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (Continued)

SYSTEM TYPE KIND OF CABLE FRAME NAME FIGURE TABLE

Power Cable

IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-21 010-14

Internal Cable

IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

IMG2 010-37 -

Inter-Frame Bus Cable IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-6 011-6

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

Power Cable

IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-21 010-14

IMG3 010-18 010-11

Internal Cable

IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

IMG2 010-37 -

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-6 011-6

IMG1-IMG3 011-7 011-7

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

IMG0-IMG3 011-13 011-13

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

DUMMY

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

PIM1

PIM1 PIM1

PIM2 PIM2

PIM3

IMG2

BASEU

TOPU

FANU FANU FANU

TOPU TOPU

BASEU BASEU

12-PIM System

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

DUMMY

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

DUMMY

PIM1

PIM1 PIM1

PIM2 PIM2

PIM3

IMG3

IMG2

13-PIM System

FANU

BASEU

TOPU TOPU TOPU

TOPU

BASEU BASEU BASEU

FANU FA NU

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 103

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 6/64

Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (Continued)

SYSTEM TYPE KIND OF CABLE FRAME NAME FIGURE TABLE

Power Cable

IMG0 011-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-21 010-14

IMG3 010-19 010-12

Internal Cable

IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

IMG2 010-37 -

IMG3 010-35 -

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-6 011-6

IMG1-IMG3 011-8 011-8

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

IMG0-IMG3 011-13 011-13

Power Cable

IMG0 011-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-21 010-14

IMG3 010-20 010-13

Internal Cable

IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

IMG2 010-37 -

IMG3 010-36 -

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-6 011-6

IMG1-IMG3 011-9 011-9

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

IMG0-IMG3 011-13 011-13

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

DUMMY

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

DUMMY

PIM1

PIM1 PIM1

PIM1

PIM2 PIM2

PIM3

IMG3

IMG2

14-PIM System

FANU

BASEU

TOPU TOPU TOPU

TOPU

BASEU BASEU

BASEU

FAN U FANU

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

DUMMY

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

DUMMY

PIM1

PIM1 PIM1

PIM1

PIM2 PIM2 PIM2

PIM3

PIM3 IMG3

IMG2

BASEU

TOPU

FANU FANU FANU FANU

TOPU

TOPU TOPU

BASEU BASEU BASEU

15-PIM System

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 104

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 7/64

Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (Continued)

SYSTEM TYPE KIND OF CABLE FRAME NAME FIGURE TABLE

Power Cable

IMG0 010-13 010-6

IMG1 010-17 010-10

IMG2 010-21 010-14

IMG3 010-21 010-14

Internal Cable

IMG0 010-30 010-19

IMG1 010-34 010-23

IMG2 010-37 -

IMG3 010-37 -

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-1 011-1

011-2 011-2

IMG1-IMG2 011-6 011-6

IMG1-IMG3 011-10 011-10

Inter-Frame

Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1 011-11 011-11

IMG0-IMG2 011-12 011-12

IMG0-IMG3 011-13 011-13

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

LPM

IMG0 IMG1

DUMMY

PIM2

PIM3

TSWM

DUMMY

PIM1

PIM1 PIM1

PIM1

PIM2 PIM2 PIM2

PIM3

IMG3

IMG2

TOPU

FANU

BASEU

BASEU BASEU BASEU

FAN UFAN U

FAN U

TOPUTOPU

TOPU

16-PIM System

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 105

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-1 Locations of Connectors on the PIM Backplane

NAP-200-010

Sheet 8/64

Internal Cable Connections

LT7

ATI0

25 01

PLO

25 01

LT6

25 01 26

LT11

LT8

25 01

LT3

25 01

2650

LT2

B10 01

ALMB

B10 01

ATI1

B10 01

PWRA

PWRB

-48V1 -48V0

FAN

25 01

LT4

25 01

LT5

25 01

LT9

25 01

LT10 25 01

LT1

25 01

LT0

ALMA BUS1A

20 01 20 01

BUS0A

10 01

CONN12

CONN13 CONN11

CONN01 CONN00

CONN10

PLO1

PLO0

MUSIC0

MUSIC1

CONN02

CONN03

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 106

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-2 Locations of Connectors on the LPM (MGC) Backplane (BZ-C24)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 9/64

Internal Cable Connections

[Front]

FANC

FANU

CPUPW1 MISC11

MISC10

CPUPW0 MISC01

MISC00

[Rear]

IMG1

IMG2 ALM

IMG3

BZ-C24

REAR VIEW

LPM

(MGC)

Connectors on the BZ-C24 are located as follows.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 107

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-3 Location of Connectors on the TSWM Backplane (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 10/64

Internal Cable Connections

PWRB

MISC1B

MISC2B

MISC3B

MIO31

MUX003 MUX002 MUX001 MUX000

MUX013 MUX012 MUX011 MUX010

MUX023 MUX022 MUX021 MUX020

MUX033 MUX032 MUX031 MUX030

MUX103 MUX102 MUX101 MUX100

MUX113 MUX112 MUX111 MUX110

MUX123 MUX122 MUX121 MUX120

MUX133 MUX132 MUX131 MUX130

EMAFH

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

IOP1

IOP0

MIO30

MIO20 MIO0

MIO21 MIO1

MISC3A

MISC2A

MISC4B

MISC5B MISC5A

MISC4A

MISC1A

PWRA

TIORES1 TIORES0

MIORES1 MIORES0

FALM

ALM EMA

Note Note

Note

Note: Terminal Resistors (PZ-M497) are to be fastened onto these connectors.(MIORES1 and TIORES1 are

for dual configuration)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 108

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-4 Locations of Connectors on the Power Distribution Terminal Board (PZ-M371)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 11/64

Internal Cable Connections

PIM

LPM

BASEU

POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BOARD

REAR VIEW

DETAIL OF BOARD

PA0 PB0 PA1 PB1 PA2 PB2 PA3 PB3 PA4 PB4

GA0 +80A GB0

GB1

-48VB

GA1

-48VA

PZ-M371

(MGC)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 109

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-6. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure below.

Figure 010-5 Power Cable Connections for 1-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 12/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PZ-M371

Note:Normally,thecablearefastenedontothecabinetattheproposedlocations,wheresmalldots()areprovided

inthisfigure.

REAR FRONT

The drawing below illustrates how to run the power cables for the 1-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-6.

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 110

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-6 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 13/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

PWR #0

PWR #1

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PH-SW10 (TSW1)

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR 0

CPR 1

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

EXALMALMMUSIC TOP

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(5)

(6)

(3)

(4)

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 111

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 14/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-2 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 PIM0 -48V0 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

6 PIM0 -48V1 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 112

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-8. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure below.

Figure 010-7 Power Cable Connections for 2-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 15/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

DSP KEY

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

PWR A

PWR B

PZ-M371

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

Note: Normally,thecablearefastenedontothecabinetattheproposedlocations,wheresmalldots()areprovidedinthisfigure.

REAR FRONT

The drawing below illustrates how to run the power cables for the 2-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-8.

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 113

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-8 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 16/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

PWR #0

PWR #1

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PH-SW10 (TSW1)

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR 0

CPR 1

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 2

PA 2

PB 1

EXALMALMMUSIC TOP

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 114

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 17/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-3 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

6 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

7 PIM0 -48V0 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

8 PIM0 -48V1 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

9 PIM1 -48V0 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

10 PIM1 -48V1 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 115

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-10. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure below.

Figure 010-9 Power Cable Connections for 3-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 18/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM2

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

PIM 2

FANU

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

PZ-M371

Note: Normally,thecablearefastenedontothecabinetattheproposedlocations,wheresmalldots()areprovidedinthisfigure.

REAR FRONT

The drawing below illustrates how to run the power cables for the 3-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-10.

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 116

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-10 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 19/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

PWR #0

PWR #1

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PH-SW10 (TSW1)

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR 0

CPR 1

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

PA 2

PB 2

PA 3

PB 3

PA 4

PB 4

EXALMALMMUSIC TOP

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1) (2)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

(13)

(14)

(3) (4)

(5)

(7) (6)

(8)

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 117

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 20/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-4 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

6 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

7 BASEU PA3 PIM2 PWR A 4P PWR CA-G

8 BASEU PB3 PIM2 PWR B 4P PWR CA-H

9 PIM0 -48V0 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

10 PIM0 -48V1 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

11 PIM1 -48V0 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

12 PIM1 -48V1 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

13 PIM2 -48V0 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

14 PIM2 -48V1 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 118

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-12. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure below.

Figure 010-11 Power Cable Connections for 4-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 21/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM 2

PIM 3

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

PIM 2

PIM 3

FANU

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

PWR A

PWR B

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

- 48 V0

- 48 V1

Note: Normally,thecablearefastenedontothecabinetattheproposedlocations,wheresmalldots()areprovidedinthisfigure.

REAR FRONT

The drawing below illustrates how to run the power cables for the 4-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-12.

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 119

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-12 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 22/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

PWR #0

PWR #1

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PH-SW10 (TSW1)

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR 0

CPR 1

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

PA 2

PB 2

PA 3

PB 3

PA 4

PB 4

EXALMALMMUSIC TOP

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

(15)

(16)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 3

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

(17)

(18)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(9)

(10)

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 120

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 23/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-5 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

6 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

7 BASEU PA3 PIM2 PWR A 4P PWR CA-G

8 BASEU PB3 PIM2 PWR B 4P PWR CA-H

9 BASEU PA4 PIM3 PWR A 4P PWR CA-I

10 BASEU PB4 PIM3 PWR B 4P PWR CA-J

11 PIM0 -48V0 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

12 PIM0 -48V1 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

13 PIM1 -48V0 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

14 PIM1 -48V1 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

15 PIM2 -48V0 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

16 PIM2 -48V1 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

17 PIM3 -48V0 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

18 PIM3 -48V1 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 121

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the internal power cables, referring to Figure 010-13 through Figure 010-21.

Figure 010-13 Power Cable Connections for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 24/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 04 05 06 07 08

PWR #0

PWR #1

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR 0

CPR 1

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

PA 2

PB 2

PA 3

PB 3

PA 4

PB 4

EXALMALMMUSIC TOP

-48 IN

CONN

-48 IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

(15)

(16)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 3

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

(17)

(18)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(9)

(10)

-48 IN

CONN

-48 IN

CONN

-48 IN

CONN

-48 IN

CONN

-48 IN

CONN

-48 IN

CONN -48 IN

CONN

-48 IN

CONN

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 122

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 25/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-6 Power Cable Connections for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 LPM (PWR) -48V IN CONN MISC PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

6 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

7 BASEU PA3 PIM2 PWR A 4P PWR CA-G

8 BASEU PB3 PIM2 PWR B 4P PWR CA-H

9 BASEU PA4 PIM3 PWR A 4P PWR CA-I

10 BASEU PB4 PIM3 PWR B 4P PWR CA-J

11 PIM0 -48V0 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

12 PIM0 -48V1 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

13 PIM1 -48V0 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

14 PIM1 -48V1 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

15 PIM2 -48V0 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

16 PIM2 -48V1 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

17 PIM3 -48V0 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-A

18 PIM3 -48V1 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN 3P PWR CA-B

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 123

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-14 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 26/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 0

TSWM

BASEU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A PWR A PWR B

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 124

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 27/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-7 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 TSWM PWR A 4P PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 TSWM PWR B 4P PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

6 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 125

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-15 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 28/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

TSWM

BASEU

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

PWR A PWR B-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5) (6)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(9)

TOPU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

PA 2

PB 2

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 126

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 29/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-8 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 TSWM PWR A 4P PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 TSWM PWR B 4P PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

6 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

7 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

8 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

9 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

10 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 127

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-16 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 30/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

TSWM

BASEU

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

PWR A PWR B-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) (7)

(8)

(10)

(9)

(12)

(11)

(14)

(13)

TOPU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

PA 2

PB 2

PA 3

PB 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2222 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

FANU

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 128

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 31/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-9 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 TSWM PWR A 4P PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 TSWM PWR B 4P PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

6 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

7 BASEU PA3 PIM2 PWR A 4P PWR CA-G

8 BASEU PB3 PIM2 PWR B 4P PWR CA-H

9 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

10 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

11 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

12 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

13 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

14 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 129

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-17 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 32/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

TSWM

BASEU

PZ-M371

PA 0

PB 0

PA 1

PB 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

PWR A PWR B-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) (7)

(8) (9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

TOPU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

PA 2

PB 2

PA 3

PB 3

PA 4

PB 4

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

FANU

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 3

FANU

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

(18)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 130

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 33/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-10 Power Cable Connections for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA0 TSWM PWR A 4P PWR CA-A

2 BASEU PB0 TSWM PWR B 4P PWR CA-B

3 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

4 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

5 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

6 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

7 BASEU PA3 PIM2 PWR A 4P PWR CA-G

8 BASEU PB3 PIM2 PWR B 4P PWR CA-H

9 BASEU PA4 PIM3 PWR A 4P PWR CA-I

10 BASEU PB4 PIM3 PWR B 4P PWR CA-J

11 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

12 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

13 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

14 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

15 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

16 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

17 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM3 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

18 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM3 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 131

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-18 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 34/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

PZ-M371

PA 1

PB 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 132

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 35/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-11 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

2 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

3 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

4 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 133

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-19 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 36/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

DUMMY

BASEU

PZ-M371

PA 1

PB 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

(6)

(5)

(8)

(7)

TOPU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

PA 2

PB 2

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 134

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 37/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-12 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

2 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

3 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

4 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

5 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

6 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

7 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

8 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 135

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-20 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 38/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

DUMMY

BASEU

PZ-M371

PA 1

PB 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(9)

(12)

(11)

TOPU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

PA 2

PB 2

PA 3

PB 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

FANU

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 136

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 39/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-13 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

2 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

3 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

4 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

5 BASEU PA3 PIM2 PWR A 4P PWR CA-G

6 BASEU PB3 PIM2 PWR B 4P PWR CA-H

7 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

8 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

9 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

10 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

11 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

12 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 137

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-21 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 40/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

DUMMY

BASEU

PZ-M371

PA 1

PB 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) (7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

TOPU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

PA 2

PB 2

PA 3

PB 3

PA 4

PB 4

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

FANU

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

-48V0 PWR A

PWR B

-48V1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR PWR

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 3

FANU

-48V IN

CONN

-48V IN

CONN

(16)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 138

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 41/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-14 Power Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 BASEU PA1 PIM0 PWR A 4P PWR CA-C

2 BASEU PB1 PIM0 PWR B 4P PWR CA-D

3 BASEU PA2 PIM1 PWR A 4P PWR CA-E

4 BASEU PB2 PIM1 PWR B 4P PWR CA-F

5 BASEU PA3 PIM2 PWR A 4P PWR CA-G

6 BASEU PB3 PIM2 PWR B 4P PWR CA-H

7 BASEU PB4 PIM3 PWR A 4P PWR CA-I

8 BASEU PB4 PIM3 PWR B 4P PWR CA-J

9 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

10 PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM0 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

11 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

12 PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM1 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

13 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

14 PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM2 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

15 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM3 -48V0 3P PWR CA-A

16 PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN PIM3 -48V1 3P PWR CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 139

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the bus cables, referring to Figure 010-23. Then, fasten the bus cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure be-

low.

Figure 010-22 Bus Cable Connections for 1-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 42/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MUSIC0

DSP KEY

ALMA

ALM

BUS1A

BUS0A

TOP

MUSIC

LCON

TOP

ALM

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

Note: Normally, the cable are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots ( ) are provided in this figure.

REAR FRONT

The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 1-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-23.

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 140

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-23 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System)

Note: Cable in bracket is for a dual-system.

NAP-200-010

Sheet 43/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-15 Bus Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE CONNECTOR NAME UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 LPM (CPR#0) LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM0 BUS0A IPX GT BUS CA-A

(2) LPM (CPR#1) LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM0 BUS1A IPX GT BUS CA-A

3 LPM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

4 LPM MUSIC (EMA

Front Connector) PIM0 MUSIC0 IPX MUSIC CA-A

5 LPM TOP (EMA

Front Connector) TOPU

KEY and DSP

(DSPL for sin-

gle stack)

DSPKEY CA-A

6 LPM ALM (EMA Front

Connector) BASEU (FALM) FALM CA-A

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PH-SW10 (TSW1)

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR#0

CPR#1

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted-line indicates a bus cable for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

BZ-C24

PZ-DK222

PZ-DK223

MUSIC

TOP

ALM

EXALMEXALM

FALM

PZ-M377

KEY

(3)

(4)

(5)

DSP

MUSIC0

ALM

ALMA BUS0ABUS1A

LCON LCON

(6)

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 141

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the bus cables, referring to Figure 010-25. Then, fasten the bus cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure be-

low.

Figure 010-24 Bus Cable Connections for 2-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 44/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MUSIC0

ALMB

ALMA

DSP KEY

ALMA

ALM

BUS1A

BUS0A

TOP

MUSIC

MUX1

MUX

LCON

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

Note: Normally, the cable are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots ( ) are provided in this figure.

REAR FRONT

ALM

The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 2-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-25.

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 142

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-25 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 45/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR#0

CPR#1

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted-lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

BZ-C24

PZ-DK222

PZ-DK223

MUSIC

TOP

ALM

EXALM

KEY

(3)

(4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 1

(6) DSP

(5)

MUSIC0

ALM

ALMA BUS0ABUS1A

ALMA

ALMB

BUS0A

MUX1MUX2MUX3

MUX

BUS1A

(7) (8)

LCON LCON

FALM

PZ-M377 (9)

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 143

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Note: Cable in bracket is for a dual-system.

NAP-200-010

Sheet 46/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-16 Bus Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1LPM

(CPR#0)

LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM0 BUS0A IPX GT BUS CA-A

(2) LPM

(CPR#1)

LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM1 BUS1A IPX GT BUS CA-A

3 LPM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

4 LPM MUSIC (EMA

Front Connector) PIM0 MUSIC0 IPX MUSIC CA-A

5 PIM0 ALMB PIM1 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

6 LPM TOP (EMA

Front Connector) TOPU

KEY and DSP

(DSPL for single

stack)

DSPKEY CA-A

7PIM0

MUX1 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM1 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-90 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 13

(8) PIM0 MUX1 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM1 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-90 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 14

9 LPM ALM (EMA Front

Connector) BASEU (FALM) FALM CA-A

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 144

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the bus cables, referring to Figure 010-27. Then, fasten the bus cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure be-

low.

Figure 010-26 Bus Cable Connections for 3-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 47/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MUSIC0

ALMB

ALMA

DSP KEY

ALMA

ALM

BUS1A

BUS0A

TOP

MUSIC

MUX1

MUX2

MUX

LCON

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM 2

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

PIM 2

FANU

ALMB

ALMA

MUX

The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 3-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-27.

Note: Normally, the cable are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots ( ) are provided in this figure.

REAR FRONT

ALM

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 145

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-27 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 48/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR#0

CPR#1

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted-lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

BZ-C24

PZ-DK222

PZ-DK223

MUSIC

TOP

ALM

EXALM

KEY

(3)

(4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 1

(7) DSP

(5)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 2

FANU

(6)

MUSIC

ALM

ALMA BUS0ABUS1A

ALMA

ALMB

MUX1MUX2MUX3

MUX

ALMA

ALMB

MUX

(8) (9)

(10) (11)

LCON LCON

FALM

PZ-M377 (12)

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 146

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Note: Cable in bracket is for a dual-system.

NAP-200-010

Sheet 49/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-17 Bus Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1LPM

(CPR#0)

LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM0 BUS0A IPX GT BUS CA-A

(2) LPM

(CPR#1)

LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM1 BUS1A IPX GT BUS CA-A

3 LPM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

4 LPM MUSIC (EMA

Front Connector) PIM0 MUSIC0 IPX MUSIC CA-A

5 PIM0 ALMB PIM1 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

6 PIM1 ALMB PIM2 ALMA 20AL-(20) FLT CA

7 LPM TOP (EMA

Front Connector) TOPU

KEY and DSP

(DSPL for single

stack)

DSPKEY CA-A

8PIM0

MUX1 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM1 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-90 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 13

(9) PIM0 MUX1 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM1 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-90 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 14

10 PIM0 MUX2 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM2 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-140 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 13

(11) PIM0 MUX2 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM2 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-140 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 14

12 LPM ALM (EMA Front

Connector) BASEU (FALM) FALM CA-A

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 147

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-29. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to the figure below.

Figure 010-28 Bus Cable Connections for 4-PIM System

NAP-200-010

Sheet 50/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MUSIC0

ALMB

ALMA

DSP KEY

ALMA

ALM

BUS1A

BUS0A

TOP

MUSIC

MUX1

MUX2

MUX3

MUX

LCON

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM 2

PIM 3

LPM

(MGC)

PIM 0

PIM 1

PIM 2

PIM 3

FANU

ALMB

ALMA

MUX

ALMB

ALMA

The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 4-PIM system. For details on actual cable running,

see Figure 010-29.

Note: Normally, the cable are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots ( ) are provided in this figure.

REAR FRONT

ALM

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 148

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-29 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 51/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR#0

CPR#1

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted-lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.

(1)

(2)

BZ-C24

PZ-DK222

PZ-DK223

MUSIC

TOP

ALM

EXALM

KEY

(3)

(4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 1

(8) DSP

(5)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 2

FANU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 3

(6)

(7)

MUSIC

ALM

ALMA BUS0ABUS1A

ALMA

ALMB

MUX1MUX2MUX3

MUX

ALMA

ALMB

MUX

(9) (10)

(11) (12)

ALMA

MUX

(13) (14)

LCON LCON

FALM

PZ-M377 (15)

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 149

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Note: Cable in bracket is for a dual-system.

NAP-200-010

Sheet 52/64

Internal Cable Connections Single IMG Configuration

Table 010-18 Bus Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1LPM

(CPR#0)

LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM0 BUS0A IPX GT BUS CA-A

(2) LPM

(CPR#1)

LCON (GT-25

Front Connector) PIM1 BUS1A IPX GT BUS CA-A

3 LPM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

4LPMMUSIC (EMA

Front Connector) PIM0 MUSIC0 IPX MUSIC CA-A

5 PIM0 ALMB PIM1 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

6 PIM1 ALMB PIM2 ALMA 20AL-(20) FLT CA

7 PIM2 ALMB PIM3 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

8LPM TOP (EMA

Front Connector) TOPU

KEY and DSP

(DSPL for single

stack)

DSPKEY CA-A

9PIM0

MUX1 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM1 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-90 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 13

(10) PIM0 MUX1 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM1 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-90 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 14

11 PIM0 MUX2 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM2 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-140 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 13

(12) PIM0 MUX2 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM2 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-140 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 14

13 PIM0 MUX3 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM3 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-180 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 13

(14) PIM0 MUX3 (PH-SW10

Front Connector) PIM3 MUX (PH-PC36

Front Connector) MT24 TSW CA-180 TSW / MUX card

in Slot No. 14

15 LPM ALM (EMA Front

Connector) BASEU (FALM) FALM CA-A

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 150

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-30 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 53/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

EMA

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TOPU

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

CPR#0

CPR#1

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BSCM

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted-lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.

BZ-C24

PZ-DK222

PZ-DK223

MUSIC

TOP

ALM

EXALM

KEY

(1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 1

(5) DSP

(2)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 2

FANU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM 3

(3)

(4)

ALM

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

ALMA

ALMB

MUX

ALMA

ALMB

MUX

ALMA

MUX

LCON LCON

FALM

PZ-M377

(6)

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 151

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 54/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-19 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1LPM

(MGC) ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

2 PIM0 ALMB PIM1 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

3 PIM1 ALMB PIM2 ALMA 20AL-(20) FLT CA

4 PIM2 ALMB PIM3 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

5LPM

(MGC)

TOP (EMA

Front Connector) TOPU

KEY and DSP

(DSPL for single

stack)

DSPKEY CA-A

6LPM ALM (EMA

Front Connector) BASEU (FALM) FALM CA-A

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 152

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-31 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 55/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-20 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

2 TSWM MUX010 PIM0 MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 01

3 TSWM MUX110 PIM0 MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 11

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 0

TSWM

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted-line indicates a bus cable for a dual-system.

(2)

(3)

KEY

MUX110 MUX010

MUX111 MUX011

MUX112 MUX012

MUX113 MUX013

(1)

DSP

MUX

ALM

ALMA

(TSW11) (TSW01)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 153

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-32 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 56/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 0

TSWM

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Connect the internal bus cables for 2-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that dotted-line indicates

bus cables for a dual-system.

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

KEY

MUX110 MUX010

MUX111 MUX011

MUX112 MUX012

MUX113 MUX013

(1)

DSP

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

MUX

(6)

ALM

ALMA

ALMB

(TSW11) (TSW01)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 154

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 57/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-21 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

2 TSWM MUX010 PIM0 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 01

3 TSWM MUX110 PIM0 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 11

4 TSWM MUX011 PIM1 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 01

5 TSWM MUX111 PIM1 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 11

6 PIM0 ALMB PIM1 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 155

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-33 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 58/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 0

TSWM

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Connect the internal bus cables for 3-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that dotted-line indicates

bus cables for a dual-system.

(2)

(4)

(6)

(3)

(5) (7)

KEY

MUX110 MUX010

MUX111 MUX011

MUX112 MUX012

MUX113

(TSW11)

MUX013

(1)

DSP

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

MUX

(8)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

MUX

(9)

(TSW01)

ALM

ALMA

ALMB

ALMA

ALMB

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 156

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 59/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-22 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

2 TSWM MUX010 PIM0 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 01

3 TSWM MUX110 PIM0 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 11

4 TSWM MUX011 PIM1 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 01

5 TSWM MUX111 PIM1 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 11

6 TSWM MUX012 PIM2 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 01

7 TSWM MUX112 PIM2 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 11

8 PIM0 ALMB PIM1 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

9 PIM1 ALMB PIM2 ALMA 20AL-(20) FLT CA

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 157

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-34 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 60/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

TSWM

BASEU

Connect the internal bus cables for 4-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that dotted-line indicates

bus cables for a dual-system.

(2)

(4)

(6)

(8)

(3)

(5) (7) (9)

MUX110 MUX010

MUX111 MUX011

MUX112 MUX012

MUX113

(TSW11)

MUX013

(1)

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

MUX

(10)

(8)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

MUX

(11)

(TSW01)

PIM 3

FANU

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

MUX

(12)

TOPU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

KEY

DSP

ALM

ALMA

ALMB

ALMA

ALMB

ALMA

ALMB

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 158

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010

Sheet 61/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 010-23 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM ALM PIM0 ALMA 20AL-(60) FLT CA

2 TSWM MUX010 PIM0 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 01

3 TSWM MUX110 PIM0 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D TSW 11

4 TSWM MUX011 PIM1 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 01

5 TSWM MUX111 PIM1 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 11

6 TSWM MUX012 PIM2 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 01

7 TSWM MUX112 PIM2 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 11

8 TSWM MUX013 PIM3 MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 01

9 TSWM MUX113 PIM3 MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 11

10 PIM0 ALMB PIM1 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

11 PIM1 ALMB PIM2 ALMA 20AL-(20) FLT CA

12 PIM2 ALMB PIM3 ALMA 20AL-(10) FLT CA

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 159

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figuers 010-35 through 010-37 show the configuration of the internal bus cables for IMG2/3. Because bus cables

for the 1-PIM system all adopt inter-frame connections with other cabinets (IMG0 and 1), explanations are given

here about the 2-PIM configuration or more. (cf. NAP 200-011; "Inter-frame Cable Connections.")

Figure 010-35 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 62/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

When 2-PIM system is adopted in IMG2 or 3, the required connection is as follows:

KEY

DSP

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

MUX

Note: For these cable running, refer to NAP-011: "Inter-frame Cable Connections."

ALMA

ALMB

To IMG1

To IMG0

Note

20AL-(10)FLT CA

DSPALM CA-B (for IMG2)

DSPALM CA-C (for IMG3)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 160

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-36 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 63/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

FANU

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

When 3-PIM system is adopted in IMG2 or 3, the required connection is as follows:

KEY

DSP

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

MUX

Note: For these cable running, refer to NAP-011: "Inter-frame Cable Connections."

ALMA

ALMB

To IMG1

To IMG0

Note

20AL-(10)FLT CA

ALMA To IMG1

Note

20AL-(20)FLT CA

DSPALM CA-B (for IMG2)

DSPALM CA-C (for IMG3)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 161

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 010-37 Internal Bus Cable Connections for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-010

Sheet 64/64

Internal Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

FANU

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

When 4-PIM system is adopted in IMG2 or 3, the required connection is as follows.

KEY

DSP

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 3

MUX

Note: For these cable running, refer to NAP-011: "Inter-frame Cable Connections."

ALMA

ALMB

To IMG1

To IMG0

Note

DSPALM CA-B (for IMG2)

DSPALM CA-C (for IMG3)

20AL-(10)FLT CA

ALMB

20AL-(10)FLT CA

ALMA

To IMG1

Note

20AL-(20)FLT CA

ALMA

To IMG1

Note

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 162

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains how to run the frame-to-frame cables for 2/3/4-IMG System.

NAP-200-011

Sheet 1/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

STAR

Connection of Inter-frame ISA Bus Cables Refer to Figure 011-1.

Connection of Inter-frame Bus Cables Refer to Figures 011-2 through 011-10.

Connection of Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cables Refer to Figures 011-11 through 011-13.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 163

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-1 Inter-Frame ISA Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG1 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 2/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-1 Inter-Frame ISA Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG1 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1CPR#0 in

LPM (MGC)

LCON

(PZ-GT26) TSWM IOP0 (Slot 11) 34PH 50AL CA-A

2CPR#1 in

LPM (MGC)

LCON

(PZ-GT26) TSWM IOP1 (Slot 10) 34PH 50AL CA-A

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

01 03 08

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPE PMOPE WDT

TOPU

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame ISA bus cables as shown below. Note that the dotted line indicates the bus cable

for a dual-system.

KEY

DSP

IMG1

IMG0

(2)

(1)

LCON LCON

(GT1)

IOP0

(GT0)

IOP1

07/31/02

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 164

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-2 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG1 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 3/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 0

LPM

(MGC)

TSWM

BASEU

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG0 and IMG1 as shown below. Note that dotted-line indicates

bus cables for a dual-system.

(2) (4) (6) (8)

MUX100 MUX000

MUX101 MUX001

MUX102 MUX002

MUX103

(TSW10)

MUX003

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 1

MUX

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM 2

MUX

(TSW00)

PIM 3

FANU

00 01 02 03 13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

MUX

TOPU

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

KEY

DSP

IMG1

IMG0

(1)

(3)

(5)

(7)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 165

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 4/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-2 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG1

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM MUX000 PIM0 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 00

2 TSWM MUX100 PIM0 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 10

3 TSWM MUX001 PIM1 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E TSW 00

4 TSWM MUX101 PIM1 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E TSW 10

5 TSWM MUX002 PIM2 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 00

6 TSWM MUX102 PIM2 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 10

7 TSWM MUX003 PIM3 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 00

8 TSWM MUX103 PIM3 (IMG0) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 10

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 166

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-3 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (1-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 5/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-3 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (1-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1TSWM MUX020 PIM0

(IMG2) MUX (Slot13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 02

2TSWM MUX120 PIM0

(IMG2) MUX (Slot14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 12

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 (1-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM0

KEY

MUX

DSP

IMG2

(1)

(2)

(TSW12)

MUX120

(TSW02)

MUX020

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 167

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-4 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (2-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 6/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM0

MUX

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 (2-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM1

KEY

MUX

DSP

IMG2

(1)

(2)

(4)

(TSW12)

MUX120

(TSW02)

MUX020

MUX121 MUX021

(3)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 168

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 7/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-4 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (2-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM MUX020 PIM0 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 02

2 TSWM MUX120 PIM0 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 12

3 TSWM MUX021 PIM1 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 02

4 TSWM MUX121 PIM1 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 12

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 169

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-5 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (3-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 8/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM0

MUX

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 (3-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

FANU

PIM1

KEY

MUX

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM2

MUX

DSP

IMG2

(1)

(2)

(4)

(6)

(TSW12)

MUX120

(TSW02)

MUX020

MUX121 MUX021

MUX122 MUX022 (3)

(5)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 170

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 9/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-5 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (3-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM MUX020 PIM0 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 02

2 TSWM MUX120 PIM0 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 12

3 TSWM MUX021 PIM1 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 02

4 TSWM MUX121 PIM1 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 12

5 TSWM MUX022 PIM2 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 02

6 TSWM MUX122 PIM2 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 12

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 171

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-6 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (4-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 10/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM0

MUX

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 (4-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

FANU

PIM1

MUX

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM2

MUX

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM3

MUX

TOPU

KEY

DSP

IMG2

(1)

(5)

(2)

(4)

(6)

(8)

(TSW12)

MUX120

(TSW02)

MUX020

MUX121 MUX021

MUX122 MUX022

MUX123 MUX023

(3)

(7)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 172

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 11/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-6 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG2 (4-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM MUX020 PIM0 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 02

2 TSWM MUX120 PIM0 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F TSW 12

3 TSWM MUX021 PIM1 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 02

4 TSWM MUX121 PIM1 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G TSW 12

5 TSWM MUX022 PIM2 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 02

6 TSWM MUX122 PIM2 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 12

7 TSWM MUX023 PIM3 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 02

8 TSWM MUX123 PIM3 (IMG2) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 12

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 173

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-7 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (1-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 12/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-7 Inter-Frame ISA Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (1-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME

1TSWM MUX030 PIM0

(IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 03

2TSWM MUX130 PIM0

(IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 13

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (1-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM0

KEY

MUX

DSP

IMG3

(1)

(2)

(TSW13)

MUX130

(TSW03)

MUX030

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 174

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-8 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (2-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 13/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM0

MUX

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (2-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

PIM1

KEY

MUX

DSP

IMG3

(1)

(2)

(4)

(TSW13)

MUX130

(TSW03)

MUX030

MUX131 MUX031

(3)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 175

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 14/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-8 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (2-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM MUX030 PIM0 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 03

2 TSWM MUX130 PIM0 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 13

3 TSWM MUX031 PIM1 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 03

4 TSWM MUX131 PIM1 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 13

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 176

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-9 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (3-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 15/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM0

MUX

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (3-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

TOPU

FANU

PIM1

KEY

MUX

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM2

MUX

DSP

IMG3

(1)

(2)

(4)

(6)

(TSW13)

MUX130

(TSW03)

MUX030

MUX131 MUX031

MUX132 MUX032 (3)

(5)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 177

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 16/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-9 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (3-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM MUX030 PIM0 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 03

2 TSWM MUX130 PIM0 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 13

3 TSWM MUX031 PIM1 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 03

4 TSWM MUX131 PIM1 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 13

5 TSWM MUX032 PIM2 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I TSW 03

6 TSWM MUX132 PIM2 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I TSW 13

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 178

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-10 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (4-PIM System)

NAP-200-011

Sheet 17/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM0

MUX

DUMMY

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

FRONT VIEWREAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (4-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the

dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG1

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

FANU

PIM1

MUX

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM2

MUX

13 14

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PIM3

MUX

TOPU

KEY

DSP

IMG3

(1)

(5)

(2)

(4)

(6)

(8)

(TSW13)

MUX130

(TSW03)

MUX030

MUX131 MUX031

MUX132 MUX032

MUX133 MUX033

(3)

(7)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 179

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 18/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-10 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connections for IMG1-IMG3 (4-PIM System)

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/

MODULE

CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1 TSWM MUX030 PIM0 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 03

2 TSWM MUX130 PIM0 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 13

3 TSWM MUX031 PIM1 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 03

4 TSWM MUX131 PIM1 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H TSW 13

5 TSWM MUX032 PIM2 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I TSW 03

6 TSWM MUX132 PIM2 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I TSW 13

7 TSWM MUX033 PIM3 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J TSW 03

8 TSWM MUX133 PIM3 (IMG3) MUX (Slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J TSW 13

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 180

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-11 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG1

NAP-200-011

Sheet 19/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PIM0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

TSWM

REAR VIEW REAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cables between IMG0 and IMG1 as shown below.

IMG1

FANU

PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

TOPU

KEY

DSP

IMG0

DSP

BZ-C24

ALM

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

EMA

EMAFH

PZ-DK223

To Front Connector

(MUSIC) on EMA Card

(1) DSPALM CA-A

(2) IPX MUSIC CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 181

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 20/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-11 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG1

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1LPM

(MGC) IMG1 TOPU(IMG1) DSP DSPALM CA-A

TSWM EMA

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 182

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-12 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG2

NAP-200-011

Sheet 21/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PIM0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

DUMMY

REAR VIEW REAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cables between IMG0 and IMG2 as shown below.

IMG2

FANU

PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

TOPU

KEY

DSP

IMG0

DSP

BZ-C24

ALM

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

ALMA

PZ-DK223

(1) DSPALM CA-B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 183

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 22/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-12 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG2

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1LPM

(MGC) IMG2 TOPU (IMG2) DSP DSPALM CA-B

PIM0 (IMG2) ALMA

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 184

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 011-13 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG3

NAP-200-011

Sheet 23/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PIM0

LPM

(MGC)

BASEU

TOPU

BASEU

DUMMY

REAR VIEW REAR VIEW

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cables between IMG0 and IMG3 as shown below.

IMG3

FANU

PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

TOPU

KEY

DSP

IMG0

DSP

BZ-C24

ALM

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

ALMA

PZ-DK223

(1) DSPALM CA-C

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 185

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011

Sheet 24/24

Inter-Frame Cable Connections Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-13 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connections for IMG0-IMG3

No.

FROM TO

CABLE NAME REMARKS

UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME UNIT/MODULE CONNECTOR

NAME

1LPM

(MGC) IMG3 TOPU (IMG3) DSP DSPALM CA-C

PIM0 (IMG3) ALMA

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 186

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP describes front cable connections between circuit cards.

Note: Protection against static electricity:

A Portable Field Service Grounding Kit must be used to protect system components from static discharge.

Figure 012-1 Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards for CCIS/ISDN

NAP-200-012

Sheet 1/1

Front Cable Connections between Circuit

Cards

START

When CCH/DCH and DTI cards are mounted in PIM (For CCIS/ISDN), connect the front cable

between CCH/DCH and DTI cards by referring to Figure 012-1.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

TRK

CN2

CCH

/DCH

DTI

(PIM)

Connecting Cable Specification

Cable Name

Desig. No.

Color Label

Length

: 10AL-(10)FLT CA

: NR-510247-001

: White

: 10/4 (cm/inch)

FRONT VIEW

DCH/CCH

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 187

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the following work items:

• Cable Running from the PBX to the MDF and ATTCON (Desk Console)

• Cable Running from the PBX to the MAT and SMDR

• Connections at the PBX Side

• Cable Tying at the Equipment Frame

Note: Compliance with EMI

To comply with EMI, Shielded cables with CHAMP connector should be used for the following installation

cables:

• Cable from the PBX to the MDF

• Cable from the PBX to Attendant Console

• Cable from the PBX to alarm indicating equipment

• Cable from the PBX to the external music-on-hold source

• Cable for line test (connected to TEST connection)

NAP-200-013

Sheet 1/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 188

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MDF AND ATTCON

NAP-200-013

Sheet 2/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

START

Cables (25P) for LT Connectors At the PBX side, verify the names of the connectors

on the PIM backplane, then bring each LT cable up to

the corresponding connector position.

Refer to Figure 013-1.

Cables for Desk Console Connectors Referring to NAP-200-016, run the installation

cables for the Desk Console to the relevant connector

positions.

Cables (25P) for EXALM

Connector

At the PBX side, confirm the name of the connectors

on the EMA card, then bring the IPX EXALM CA-A

and installation cable up to the connector position.

Cables (25P) for NCU Connectors At the PBX side, bring each NCU cable up to the

connector on the front of the PFT cards to be

mounted in the PIM. Refer to Figure 015-4.

At the MDF side, confirm the location of the

Terminal Block to which the cable is to be

terminated, then bring the cable up to the terminal

block.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 189

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013

Sheet 3/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

Cables for ODT Connectors Referring to description of 8TLT card in the

Circuit Card Manual, connect each 2400

ODT CABLE/2400 ODT CABLE-A and the

corresponding installation cables.

At the PBX side, bring each 2400 ODT

CABLE/2400 ODT CABLE-A up to the

connector position on the front of the 8TLT

cards to be mounted in the PIM.

At the MDF side, confirm the location of the

Terminal Blocks to which each cable is to be

terminated, then bring the cables up to the

terminal blocks.

END

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 190

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 013-1 LT Cable Routing

NAP-200-013

Sheet 4/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

(PIM3)

(TOPU)

(PIM2)

(PIM1)

(PIM0)

(LPM (MGC))

(BASEU)

(FANU)

REAR VIEW

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 191

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 013-2 Cable Routing of Circuit Card Front Cable

NAP-200-013

Sheet 5/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Cable Duct

SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW

Cable

Cable Hole

Circuit Card

Front Connector

Circuit Card

Up to three circuit card

front cables can be run

through the cable hole.

Six circuit card front

cables can be accommodated;

three on the left side, and

three on the right side.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 192

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MAT AND SMDR

NAP-200-013

Sheet 6/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

START

MAT (Refer to NAP-200-017) Referring to NAP-200-017, connect IPX 2PORT CA-

A and the installation cable (25P).

At the PBX side, confirm the connector name on the

IOC card, then run IPX 2PORT CA-A up to the

connector position.

At the MAT side, run RS-232-CA “1” up to the MAT.

SMDR (Refer to NAP-200-018) Referring to NAP-200-018, connect the PBX and the

SMDR equipment.

At the PBX side, confirm the connector name on the

IOC card, then run IPX 2PORT CA-A up to the

connector position.

At the SMDR equipment side, run the installation

cable (25P) up to the SMDR equipment.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 193

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. CONNECTIONS AT THE PBX SIDE

4. CABLE TYING AT THE PBX

NAP-200-013

Sheet 7/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

START

LT Connectors Confirm each connector name on the backplane

and the corresponding LT connector, then

connect the two.

EXALM Connector Connect the IPX EXALM CA-A to the EXALM

connector on the EMA card.

NCU Connectors Connect the NCU cable to the connector on the

front of the PFT card.

IOC Connectors Connect IPX 2PORT CA-A to the CONN0/1

connectors on the IOC card.

END

START

Referring to Figure 013-3, secure the connector cables to the Module.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 194

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 013-3 Example of Cable Tying Using Tie-Wrap

NAP-200-013

Sheet 8/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Backplane

LT6

PLO

LT3

LT2

LT5

LT4

LT0

LT1

REAR SIDE

TIE-WRAP

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 195

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

5. TERMINATION OF THE CABLES BETWEEN THE PBX AND THE MDF OR ATTCON ONTO THE CABLE

SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

NAP-200-013

Sheet 9/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

START

Removing the Cable Support Assembly. Remove the Cable Support Assembly from the

BASEU. (See Figure 013-4.)

Peeling the cable cover Referring to Table 013-1, confirm the cable

terminating locations on the Cable Support

Assembly.

At the cable terminating locations, peel off the

cable cover as shown on Figure 013-5.

Terminating the cable Referring to Figure 013-5, wind the clamp (M-

398902/E0809A) onto the cable portion from

which the cover has been peeled off.

Referring to Figure 013-6, terminate the cable

onto the Cable Support Assembly.

When all the cables have been terminated to the Cable Support Assembly A, likewise terminate the

cables onto the Cable Support Assembly B, C, D, E in order.

END

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 196

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 013-4 Cable Support Assembly

NAP-200-013

Sheet 10/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

AB C D

(LPM (MGC))

REAR VIEW (BASEU)

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

FRONT

SIDE VIEW

(LPM (MGC))

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 197

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013

Sheet 11/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

Table 013-1 Cable Support Assembly

BACKPLANE CABLE

SUPPORT No. USE REMARKS

MODULE CONNECTOR NAME

LPM

(MGC)

CONN0, CONN1 Not Used For I/O Equipment

(MAT, Printer, etc.)

These connectors appear on

the front edge of IOC/EMA

card.

EXALM Not Used For Alarm Indicating

Panel, etc.

PIM0

Front of Circuit Card

The number of cables is

limited to three for one

side, and six for both

sides.

When the required number of

cables exceeds 20, the Cable

Support Assembly extra

cables should be used.

LT0 - LT11 A LT cable

PIM1

Front of Circuit Card

The number of cables is

limited to three for one

side, and six for both

sides.

When the required number of

cables exceeds 20, the Cable

Support Assembly extra

cables should be used.

LT0 - LT11 B LT ca bl e

PIM2

Front of Circuit Card

The number of cables is

limited to three for one

side, and six for both

sides.

When the required number of

cables exceeds 20, the Cable

Support Assembly extra

cables should be used.

LT0 - LT11 C LT ca bl e

PIM3

Front of Circuit Card

The number of cables is

limited to three for one

side, and six for both

sides.

When the required number of

cables exceeds 20, the Cable

Support Assembly extra

cables should be used.

LT0 - LT11 D LT cable

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 198

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 013-5 Clamp Winding

NAP-200-013

Sheet 12/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

Shield cable

Approx.

18 mm (0.72 inch)

CLAMP (M-398902)

There are 2 kinds of clamp (M-398902 and E0809A), this figure shows an example where M-398902 clamp

is used. In the case of E0809A, you can bypass step 2.

Step 1: Strip off about 18mm of cable sheath as shown below.

Step 2: Fold over the clamp (M-398902) as shown below. In the

case of E0809A clamp, this step is not necessary.

Step 3: Wind the clamp (M-398902/E0809A) onto the cable por-

tion where the cover has been stripped off.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 199

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 013-6 Termination of Installation Cables

NAP-200-013

Sheet 13/13

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,

ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

(FRONT)

CABLE

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

CABLE SUPPORT

ASSEMBLY

CLAMP CABLE

PANHEAD SCREW

(PL-C, P, B, MS 4X8X3 GF)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 200

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the procedures for terminating cables at the MDF.

CAUTION: When terminating Cables to the MDF, the line/trunk circuit card should extend about 50 mm (2

inches) from the module and must not contact the backplane connector.

NAP-200-014

Sheet 1/1

Termination of Cables on MDF (Wire

Accommodation of Each Cable)

START

Cable trying at the MDF Secure the CHAMP Connector cables, which have

been extended to the MDF whenever connecting a

front cable (NAP-200-012) to the cable supports on

the MDF after confirming their positions on the

terminal block.

Cutting excess cable Shorten each CHAMP connector cable, leaving

enough length so that they can be neatly terminated

to the terminal block.

Cable termination to the MDF Referring to the Circuit Card Manual, punch down

the CHAMP connector cables to the MDF.

Confirming connections After confirming that no erroneous connections have

been made on the Module Group side, use an IC

buzzer on similar device to verify the connections at

the MDF.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 201

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the following work items:

NAP-200-015

Sheet 1/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

MDF

C.O. Line/

Tie Line

Cross Connection of

Stations

Cross Connection of

Trunks (C.O. Lines and

Tie Lines)

Cross Connections

for PFT

Cross connection of Alarm

Indicating Panel and

Cross connections for

TAS indicator

Cross connections for

External Switches

Connection of

Announcement

Machine

Connection of

Paging Equipment

Cross connections for

Dterm Series E/Dterm 75

Cross Connections

for Digital Interfaces

PBX

page 202

page 203

page 205

page 208

page 213

page 216

page 218

page 220

page 222

page 226

Music on Hold

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 202

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. CROSS CONNECTION OF STATIONS

Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended

that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distin-

guished.

Note 2: For cross connections between stations and C.O. lines for PFT, refer to Section 3., “CROSS CONNEC-

TIONS FOR PFT”.

Figure 015-1 Cross Connection of Stations

NAP-200-015

Sheet 2/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Checking the terminal locations on the

Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of 16LC card in the Circuit Card

Manual, identify the lead names for the 16LC

card and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection Referring to Figure 015-1, provide the necessary

cross connections.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

AXX

MDF

BXX

16LC

CARD TELEPHONE

SET

Module Group Side

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 203

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. CROSS CONNECTION OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES)

Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended

that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distin-

guished.

Note 2: For cross connections between stations and C.O. lines for PFT, refer to Section 3., “CROSS CONNEC-

TIONS FOR PFT” in this NAP.

NAP-200-015

Sheet 3/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Checking the terminal locations on

the Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of 16COT card or 8TLT card in the

Circuit Card Manual, identify the lead names for

the 16COT, or 8TLT card and the terminal

locations of the leads.

Cross Connection Referring to Figure 015-2, provide the necessary

cross connections.

END

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 204

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-2 Cross Connection of Trunks (C.O. Lines and Tie Lines)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 4/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

16COT

CARD C.O. LINE

Module Group Side

8TLT

CARD TIE LINE

TAX

RAX

8TLT

CARD TIE LINE

TBX

RBX

(1) 16COT card

(3) 8TLT card (for E&M Trunk)

(2) 8TLT card (for DID Trunk)

Note 1

Note 1: For 2W/4W E&M systems, these leads are not used.

Note 2: For No. 4–7 trunks, the leads appear at the front of the card. Refer to the description of the

8TLT card in the Circuit Card Manual.

Note 2

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 205

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR PFT

Note 1: The COT must be accommodated in a universal slot of the same Unit (U) in which the cross-connected PFT

is mounted. See the figure below.

Note 2: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended

that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distin-

guished.

Figure 015-3 Mounting Locations of PFT (PA-M53)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 5/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PFT (PA-M53)

MUX/TSW

PIM

The PFT (PA-M53) card is mounted in slot 04 or in slot 15 of each PIM.

FRONT VIEW

COT

MUX/TSW

PFT (PA-M53)

Universal Slots Universal Slots

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 206

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015

Sheet 6/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Checking the terminal locations on

the Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Section 1., “CROSS CONNECTION OF

STATIONS” and Section 2., “CROSS CONNECTION

OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES)” in this

NAP, identify the lead names of the stations and trunks

to be connected to the PFT (NCU) card and the

terminal locations of the leads.

Referring to description of PFT card in the “NEAX

2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual,” identify the lead

names for the “NCU” connector, “LT” connector, and

the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection Referring to Figure 015-4, provide the necessary cross

connections.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 207

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-4 Cross Connection for PFT

NAP-200-015

Sheet 7/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

PBX

COT

PFT(PA-M53) Card

AXX

BXX

AXX

BXX

MDFMDF

NCU

ROXX

TOXX

RIXX

TIXX

NCU

AOXX

BOXX

AIXX

BIXX

Analog Telephone

Installation Cable

: When PIM Power is OFF

: When PIM Power is ON

Central

Office

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 208

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. CROSS CONNECTION OF ALARM INDICATING PANEL AND MUSIC ON HOLD

Note: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended

that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distin-

guished.

• Alarm Indicating Panel

• Music On Hold

NAP-200-015

Sheet 8/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Mounting Alarm Indicating panel Mount the Alarm Indicating Panel using AY plugs,

curl plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running Referring to Figure 015-6, run the cables between

the Alarm Indicating Panel and the MDF.

Referring to Figure 015-6, run the cable between

the RPT on BASEU and the MDF.

Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables Terminate the installed cables to the Alarm

Indicating Panel, MDF, and RPT terminals.

Cross connection Referring the Figure 015-6, provide the necessary

cross connections at the Alarm Indicating Panel

side and Module Group side.

END

START

Cross connection Referring to Figures 015-6, run the cable between the

MDF and the music source.

Connect the music source to the FM0 and E connections.

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 209

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-5 IPX EXALM CA-A Cabling Diagram

NAP-200-015

Sheet 9/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

NEC

TPWR FALM

012345

-48V GND

RPT0 RPT1

3.2

5.0

EMA card

(in slot 08)

RPT Terminal (PZ-M377)

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSEMBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD

SLOT NO. 0123456

CPUOPEPMOPEWDT

EXALM

EMA card

RPT Terminal (PZ-M377)

LPM

BASEU

GND (RPT1)

GND

-48V (RPT0)

-48V

EXALM

BELL

FRONT VIEW

IPX EXALM CA-A Installation Cable

Locations of Terminal and Connector

Cabling Diagram

EXALM connector appears on the front edge of PX-PC00-A (EMA) card.

LPM (MGC)

BASEU

MDF

Audible and Visual

Alarm Indicating

Panel

EXALM

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 210

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-6 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold (Single IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 10/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MDF

External

Alarm

External

Alarm

(Rectifier)

dry-relay

Power

Equipment

NEC

When the rectifier is equipped with a "dry-relay," connect the cable as follows.

MPALM is used to receive alarm information from Power Equipment (Rectifier). When Ground is detected, the PBX regards it as "alarm."

EXALM

Cross Connections

to EXALM

EMA card

FRONT VIEW

Note 1: FM1 is not used at this time.

No.

LEAD

NAME

LEAD

NAME

MJB

MNBMNB

SUPB

MNB

MPALM

RPT1(G)

RPT0(-48V)

FM0

FM1

MPALM

MJA

MNA

SUPA

BELL

Note 1

BELL

EXTA

MUSIC

SOURCE

MPALM

PIN No.3

COM

MDF

IPX EXALM CA-A

IPX EXALM CA-A and

Installation cable (25p)

IPX EXALM CA-A

Pin Assignment

Installation Cable

Note 3: Following numbers of lines (-48V wire/GND wire) are required, depending on the wire gauge.

WIRE GAUGENUMBER OF REQUIRED LINES

 0.4 More than 6 lines for each -48V wire/GND wire

 0.5More than 3 lines for each -48V wire/GND wire

 0.65 More than 2 lines for each -48V wire/GND wire

Note 2

Note 3

Note 2: The distance between PBX and Alarm Indicating Pannel must be less than 100 m (3.281 feet).

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 211

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-7 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel (Multiple IMG Configuration)

Figure 015-8 Connection of Music on Hold (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 11/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ï Cabling Diagram

MPALM is used to receive alarm information from Power Equipment (Rectifier). When Ground is detected, the PBX regards it as "Alarm."

When the power equipment (Rectifier) is equipped

with a "dry-relay," connect the MPALM as shown below.

MAJA

MNA

BELL

MJB

MNB

MPALM

GND

-48V

External

Alarm

External

Alarm

dry-relay

MPALM

PIN No.3

POWER EQUIPMENT

(RECTIFIER)

POWER EQUIPMENT

(RECTIFIER)

MDF

IPX EXALM CA and

Installation cable (25P)

NEC

ON OFF

BELL

EMA

LPM (MGC)

FRONT

EXALM

IPX EXALM CA cable

Installation Cable

GND

Note 1: The distance between PBX and Alarm Indicating Pannel must be less than 100 m (3.281 feet).

No.

LEAD

NAME

LEAD

NAME

MJB

MNB

SUPB

FM0

FM1

MPALM

MJA

MNA

SUPA

BELL

EXTA

IPX EXALM CA cable

Pin Assignment

Note 1

Note 2

Note 2: Following numbers of lines (-48V wire/GND wire) are required, depending on the wire gauge.

WIRE GAUGENUMBER OF REQUIRED LINES

 0.4 More than 6 lines for each -48V wire/GND wire

 0.5More than 3 lines for each -48V wire/GND wire

 0.65 More than 2 lines for each -48V wire/GND wire

No.

LEAD

NAME

FM0

FM1

EXTA

25 EXTB

No.

LEAD

NAME

Note 1

MDF

MUSIC

SOURCE

EXCLK0/EXCLK1

• Cabling Diagram

Note 1, Note 2 : FM1 is not used.

(Slot 21/33, TSWM)

Pin Assignment for Receiving

Music-on-hold Source

34 PH EXCLK CA-A and

FM0

FM1

Note 2

Installation Cable (25P)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 212

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-9 IPX EXALM CA-A Cable

NAP-200-015

Sheet 12/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

TYP1

IPX EXALM CA-A

1500mm (43 feet 2 inches)

FM0 FM0

FM1 FM1

MJA

MJB

MNA MNA

MNB

BELL BELL

MPALM

SUPA

SUPB

EXTA

BR-BK1

BR-BK2

GR-BK2

Y-BK1

Y-R1

BR-R1

BR-R2

GR-R2

GR-BK1

GY-BK1

GR-R1

GY-R1

W-BK1

Y-BK2

Y-R2

W-R1 (EXALM)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 213

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

5. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR TAS INDICATOR

Note: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended

that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distin-

guished.

NAP-200-015

Sheet 13/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Mounting TAS Indicator Mount the TAS Indicator using AY plugs, curl plugs,

board plugs, etc.

Cable running Referring to Figure 015-10, run the cables between the

TAS and the MDF.

Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables Terminate the installed cables to the TAS Indicator,

and MDF.

Checking the terminal locations on

the Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of ATI (PA-CS33) card in the “Circuit

Card Manual,” identify the lead names for the ATI card

and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection Referring to Figure 015-10, provide the necessary

cross connections at the TAS Indicator side and the

PBX side.

END

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 214

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-10 Cable Connection Diagram for TAS

NAP-200-015

Sheet 14/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

No.

LEAD

NAME

No.

LEAD

NAME

BN4800

BN4820

TAS1B

BN4810

TAS0B

BN4830

BN4801

BN4821

TAS1A

BN4811

TAS0A

BN4831

LT Connector

for TAS #1

for TAS #0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Front View

Backplane

PIM

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

Universal Slots Universal Slots

PA-CS33(ATI)

TSW/MUX

LT11 LT5

LT5

LT11

To connect TAS the PA-CS33 card is used as the interface card. The card may be mounted in Slot No. 12 or in

Slot No. 23. The leads appear on LT5 and LT11, respectively.

• PA-CS33 (ATI) mounting slots

PA-CS33 (ATI) card may be mounted

in Slot 12 and/or 23.

• LT cable connectors

Use LT5 connector when the PA-CS33

card is mounted in Slot 12. When the

card is mounted in Slot 23, use LT11

connector.

• LT cable Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the LT

connector for PA-CS33 card.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 215

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following connections at the MDF.

Figure 015-10 Cable Connection Diagram for TAS (Continued)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 15/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

MDF Installation Cable (1P)

TAS Indicator

TAS0A0

TAS0B0

TAS0A1

TAS0B1

PBX

LT connector Cable

LT connector

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 216

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

6. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL SWITCHES

Note: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended

that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distin-

guished.

Figure 015-11 Outer View of External Switch

NAP-200-015

Sheet 16/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Mounting External Switches Mount the External Switches using AY plugs, curl

plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running Referring to Figure 015-12, run the cables between the

External Switches and the MDF.

Referring to Figure 015-12, run the cables between the

External Switches and RPT on the BASEU.

Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables Terminate the installed cables to the External

Switches, and MDF.

Checking the terminal locations on

the Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of PFT (PA-M53 card in the “Circuit Card

Manual”, identify the lead names for the “LT”

connector and the terminal locations of the leads.

END

Cross connection Referring to Figure 015-12, provide the necessary

cross connections at the External Switch side and the

PBX side.

When the EFCT key is in the UP position, operations of K0-K7 are effective. To turn on a circuit, set the

corresponding key (K0-K7) in the UP position.

EFCT K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 217

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-12 Connection of External Switches

NAP-200-015

Sheet 17/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Provide cable connections at the MDF as shown below.

#2 External Switch No.0

#2 External Switch No.1

REAR VIEW

LPR

BASCF

G(RPT1)

01 02 03 04 05

MDF

Pin Assignment #1

Pin Assignment #2

No.

LEAD

NAME

KY1

KY3

KY5

KY7

LEAD

NAME

KY0

KY2

KY4

KY6

No.

PIM Backplane

LT0

LT6

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 218

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

7. CONNECTION OF ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE

Note: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.

It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can

easily be distinguished.

NAP-200-015

Sheet 18/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Mounting Announcement Machine Mount the Announcement Machine using AY plugs,

curl plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running Referring to Figure 015-13, run the cable between

the Announcement Machine and the MDF.

Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables Terminate the installed cables to the Announcement

Machine and MDF.

Checking the terminal locations on

the Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of 16COT card in the Circuit Card

Manual and Figure 015-13, identify the lead names

of the Announcement Trunk (ANTK) and the

terminal locations of the leads.

Cross connections Referring to Figure 015-13, provide the necessary

cross connections at the Announcement Machine

side and the PBX side.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 219

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-13 Connection of Announcement Machine

NAP-200-015

Sheet 19/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Note: An ANTK circuit is only available on the No. 0 circuit of the 16COT card.

If a starting wire is required, the No. 1 circuit cannot be used for a COT.

Configuration of 16COT Lead

ANTK

When No. 0 circuit is used for COT.

Speech Wires

Starting Wire

When No. 0 circuit is used for

Announcement Trunk.

Announcement Machine Cabling Diagram

TSW

MDF

SPEECH WIRES

ANTK (COT)

STARTING

WIRE

“LT” Connector Cable (25P)

already run in

Connections are made using installation cable.

ANNOUNCEMENT

MACHINE

A total of three wires are required per line: two wires

for speech and one starting wire.

For a loop start system, only two wires are required.

When using 16COT-BE,

connect to ground

No. OF

CKT

LEAD

No.0

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

No. OF

CKT

LEAD

No.0

B0 A0

B1 (M) A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

NAP-200-013.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 220

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

8. CONNECTION OF PAGING EQUIPMENT

Note: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.

It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can

easily be distinguished.

NAP-200-015

Sheet 20/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Mounting Paging Equipment Mount the Paging Equipment using AY plugs, curl

plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running Referring to Figure 015-14, run the cables between

the Paging Equipment and the MDF.

Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables Terminate the installed cables to the Paging

Equipment and the MDF.

Checking terminal locations on the

Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of 16COT card in the Circuit Card Manual

and Figure 015-14, identify the lead names for the

Paging Trunk (PGT) and the terminal locations of the

leads.

Cross connections Referring to Figure 015-14, provide the necessary

cross connections at the Paging Equipment side and

the PBX side.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 221

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-14 Connection of Paging Equipment

NAP-200-015

Sheet 21/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Note: A PGT circuit is only available on the No. 0 circuit of the 16COT card. If a starting wire is required,

the No. 1 circuit cannot be used for a COT.

Configuration of 16 COT Lead

ANTK

When No. 0 circuit is used for COT. When No. 0 circuit is used for PGT.

Paging Equipment Cabling Diagram

TSW

MDF

SPEECH WIRES

ANTK (COT)

STARTING

WIRE

“LT” Connector Cable (25P)

already run in

Connections are made using installation cable.

A total of three wires are required per line: two wires

for speech and one starting wire.

For a loop start system, only two wires are required.

AMP SP

Speech Wires

Starting Wire

When using 16 COT-BE,

connect to ground

No. OF

CKT

LEAD

No.0

No. OF

CKT

LEAD

No.0

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B0 A0

B1 (M) A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

NAP-200-013.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 222

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

9. CROSS CONNECTIONS

9.1 When Using Dterm Series E/Dterm 75

Note 1: Available distance between Module Group and Dterm is a maximum of 850 meters (2459 feet). The instal-

lation cable must be 24 AWG (0.5 mm dia.) or larger.

Figure 015-15 Outer View of Dterm Series E/Dterm 75

NAP-200-015

Sheet 22/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Cable running Referring to Figure 015-16, run the cables between

each Dterm and its Modular Block (Jack), and

between the Modular Blocks and the MDF.

Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables Referring to Figure 015-16, terminate the installed

cables to the MDF and the Modular Blocks.

Check terminal locations on the

Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of 16ELC card in the “Circuit Card

Manual,” identify the lead names for the ELC card

and the terminal locations of the leads.

END

Cross Connection Referring to Figure 015-16, provide the necessary

cross connections at the Dterm side and the PBX side.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 223

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-16 Cable Connection for Dterm Series E/Dterm 75

NAP-200-015

Sheet 23/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PBX

LT connector Cable

LT connector

ELC

A15

B15

MDF

Max 850 m. (2459 feet)

1-pair cable

(Jack)

Modular Block

Modular Cable

Provide the following connections at the MDF

D Series E

term /D 75

term

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 224

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

9.2 When using IP Terminals (IP Enabled Dtermand DtermIP INASET)

Figure 015-17 Rear Connector Locations of IP terminal

NAP-200-015

Sheet 24/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Cable connection

HUB-IP Terminal

Referring to Figure 015-16/17, connect 10/100

BASE-T/TX cable to each IP Terminal and the

Networking Equipment.

Cable connection

IP Terminal-PC

IP Terminal is equipped with a switching HUB to

connect LAN and a PC. 10/100 BASE-T/TX cable is

used for the connection.

Referring to the figure below, IP Terminal has two

RJ-45 connectors in it's backside. The connector

marked with "=" indicates the straight connection

for external HUB. The other connector marked with

"X" indicates the straight connection for the PC.

END

Connect 10/100 BASE-T/TX straight cable between

the Networking Equipment and LAN connector

marked with "=". Connect 10/100 BASE-T/TX

straight cable between PC and the PC connector

marked with "X".

to PC

to LAN

Note: PC connector marked with "X" on IP terminal is exclusively for PC, not IP terminal.

Rear View

DC 24V (=) (X)

+ -

Note

The rear connectors have switching HUB function to forward each packet

only to required port.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 225

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-18 Connecting IP Terminals to Network

9.3 When using Dterm SP20

Dterm SP20 is a software which is installed in PC and has the same function as IP terminals. The following

shows an example of connecting Dterm SP20 to LAN.

Figure 015-19 Connecting Dterm SP20 to Network

NAP-200-015

Sheet 25/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

RJ-45 Connector

Pin Assignment

Connect the Ether cable with "LAN(=)" connector. To connect a PC, use "PC(X)" connector.

IP Enabled D

term

IP INASET

DC 24V (=) (X)

+ -

REAR VIEW

8 Not Used

7 Not Used

6 RD -

5 Not Used

4 Not Used

3 RD +

2 TD -

1 TD +

123

456

789

ABC DEF

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV

OPE

WXYZ

Mic Transfer

Enter

Memo Directory Security

Hold Speaker

HomeEdit

NIC

Straight Cable

Note

Note: IP Enabled D

term

is used in this diagram as an example.

Straight Cable

Dterm SP20

LAN

NIC

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 226

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

10. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR DIGITAL INTERFACES

Perform the cross connections for digital interfaces as shown below:

Note 1: When your system is single IMG configuration, Time Division Switch (TSW) card is equipped with Phase

Lock Oscillator (PLO). Therefore, dedicated PLO card is not required when using Digital Interfaces. How-

ever, when the system requires a higher-precision oscillator, use the Oscillator (OSC: PA-CK14) card. The

cards may be mounted in slots numbered 9, and 17 of PIM0. For the OSC card, no external wiring is re-

quired.

Note 2: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended

that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distin-

guished.

NAP-200-015

Sheet 26/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START

Checking terminal

locations on the

Module Group

side of the MDF

Digital Trunk

(DTI, CCT, PRT)

Referring to the Port Accommodation

sheet and description of Digital Trunk

card in the “Circuit Card Manual,”

identify the lead names for the Digital

Trunk card and the terminal locations

of the leads.

PLO leads Referring to Figure 015-20/Figure

015-21 to identify the lead names and

the terminal locations for the PLO.

Cross Connection

Note

When accepting synchronization

clocks from other node (master or

submaster node)

Referring to Figure 015-24/Figure

015-25, provide the necessary cross

connections.

When accepting synchronization

clocks from External High-Stability

Oscillator

Referring to Figure 015-22/Figure

015-23, provide the necessary cross

connections.

END

WARNING: Back card out of the module before attempting cross connection. Otherwise, the fuse mounted

on the DTI card will blow and the card will become inoperative.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 227

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-20 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (Single IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 27/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Front View

PIM0

PLO

PLO TSW

TSW

Universal Slots Universal Slots

No.

LEAD

NAME

DCSB0

DIU0B0

DIU1B0

DIU2B0

DIU3B0

SYN0B0

SYN1B0

LEAD

NAME

DCSA0

DIU0A0

DIU1A0

DIU2A0

DIU3A0

SYN0A0

SYN1A0

No.

LEAD

NAME

DCSB0

DIU0B0

DIU1B0

DIU2B0

DIU3B0

SYN0B0

SYN1B0

LEAD

NAME

DCSA0

DIU0A0

DIU1A0

DIU2A0

DIU3A0

SYN0A0

SYN1A0

No.

DCSB1

DIU0B1

DIU1B1

DIU2B1

DIU3B1

SYN0B1

SYN1B1

DCSA1

DIU0A1

DIU1A1

DIU2A1

DIU3A1

SYN0A1

SYN1A1

DCSB1

DIU0B1

DIU1B1

DIU2B1

DIU3B1

SYN0B1

SYN1B1

DCSA1

DIU0A1

DIU1A1

DIU2A1

DIU3A1

SYN0A1

SYN1A1

for PLO

equipped

with TSW #0

for PLO

equipped

with TSW #1

for PLO

equipped

with TSW #1

for receiving clock from

a High-Stability Oscillator

for distributing clock from

a digital interface

Since PLO circuit is equipped with TSW card, PLO input leads appear on the LT connector labeled PLO.

PIM0

Backplane

PLO

• TSW mounting slots

TSW card is mounted in slots 13 and 14

of PIM0.

• LT cable connector

Connect an LT cable to the connector labeled

“PLO” on PIM0 backplane.

• PLO connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on “PLO” connector. When clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one

pair of “DIUxxx” leads among a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU leads have the following precedence:

DIU0xx(High)-> DIU3xx(Low). To receive clock from an external high-stability oscillator, use “DCSxx”

PLO Connector

for PLO

equipped

PLO Connector

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 228

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-21 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 28/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

Backplane

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

• PLO mounting slots

PLO card is mounted in slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Front View

TSWM

TSW

PLOEXCLK1

EXCLK0 PLO

• LT cable connectors

Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled “EXCLK0” and

“EXCLK1” on the TSWM backplane.

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on “EXCLK0/EXCLK1” connector. When clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of “DI-

Uxxx” leads among a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (High)-> DIU3xx (Low). On the contrary,

to receive clock from an external high-stability oscillator, use “DCSxx” leads.

REAR VIEW

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

MDF

Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH EXCLK CA-A

FM1

FM0

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1A

SYN0A

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

Cable Lead Accommodation

34 PH EXCLK CA-A

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 229

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-22 Cable Connection Diagram for Accepting Synchronization Clocks

from an External High-Stability Oscillator (Single IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 29/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PLO

MDF

PBX

PCM Cable (IP)

DCSA0

DCSB0

LT Connector Cable

DCSB1

DCSA1

TSW

BASEU

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24AWG)

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #0

CLK

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #1

CLK

• Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the

system has the TSW cards in a dual configuration.

Note: This diagram shows connections for a system having dual TSWs.

“PLO”

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 230

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-23 Cable Connection Diagram for Accepting Synchronization Clocks

from an External High-Stability Oscillator (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 30/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

MDF

IMG1

PCM Cable (IP)

DCSA

DCSB

“EXCLK1”

DCSB

DCSA

“EXCLK0”

PLO#1

PLO#0

BASEU

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24AWG)

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #1

CLK

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #0

CLK

• Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the

system has the PLO cards in a dual configuration.

Note: This diagram shows connections for a system having dual PLOs.

34 PH EXCLK CA-A

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 231

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-24 Cable Connection Diagram for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface (Single IMG

Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 31/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PLO

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

MDF

IMG1

PCM

Carrier

Equipment/

DSU

CLK

PCM Cable (2P)

LT Connector

TSW

BASEU

to other node

POUTA

POUTB

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

for PLO #0

for PLO #1

Installation Cable

Digital

Interface

(24AWG)

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of four inputs. DIU1xx leads are used for the first clock distribution routes. Thus,

DIU4xx leads are used for the fourth. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: This connection is required for a dual-TSW system.

• Cable Connection Diagram

Perform the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the Digital

Trunk POUT leads are used as the 1st clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

“PLO”

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 232

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 015-25 Cable Connection Diagram for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface

(Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-015

Sheet 32/32

Cable Termination and Cross

Connections from MDF to Peripheral

Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

MDF

IMG1

PCM

Carrier

Equipment/

DSU

CLK

PCM Cable (2P)

LT Connector

“EXCLK0”

“EXCLK1”

PLO#0

PLO#1

BASEU

to other node

POUTA

POUTB

DIU0A

DIU0B

DIU1A

DIU1B

DIU2A

DIU2B

DIU3A

DIU3B

DIU0A

DIU0B

DIU1A

DIU1B

DIU2A

DIU2B

DIU3A

DIU3B

for PLO #0

for PLO #1

Installation Cable

Digital

Interface

(24AWG)

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of four inputs. DIU1xx leads are used for the first clock distribution routes. Thus,

DIU4xx leads are used for the fourth. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: This connection is required for a dual-PLO system.

• Cable Connection Diagram

Perform the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the Digital

Trunk POUT leads are used as the 1st clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 233

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the installation of the DESK CONSOLE and Cable Connection. Figure 016-1 shows the outer

view of the DESK CONSOLE. Use the PA-CS33 (ATI) card as an interface card between the system and the DESK

CONSOLE. The card can connect a maximum of two DESK CONSOLEs.

Figure 016-1 Outer View of Desk Console

NAP-200-016

Sheet 1/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

START

Cable running While referring to Figure 016-2 through Figure 016-5,

run the cables between each DESK CONSOLE and its

Modular Block (Jack), and between the Modular

Blocks and the MDF.

Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables While referring to Figure 016-2 through Figure 016-5

terminate the installed cables to the MDF and the

Modular Blocks.

Check the terminal locations on the

Module Group side of the MDF

While referring to Port Accommodation sheet and

description of PA-CS33 card in the NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual, identify the lead names for the

card and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection While referring to Figure 016-2 and Figure 016-5,

provide the necessary cross connection at the DESK

CONSOLE side and the PBX side.

Mounting of Headset (Optional) While referring to Figure 016-6, mount optional

Headset on DESK CONSOLE.

Mounting of Handset (Optional) While referring to Figure 016-7 or Figure 016-8,

mount optional Handset on DESK CONSOLE.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 234

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-2 Cable Connection Diagram for Desk Console

NAP-200-016

Sheet 2/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

To connect DESK CONSOLE(s), the PA-CS33 card is used as the interface card. The card may be mounted

in slot No. 12 or in slot No. 23. The leads appear on LT5 and LT11 respectively. However, when replacing

Attendant Console with DESK CONSOLE, the leads appear on the LT connector on the ATT TERM (See

Note on the next page).

• PA-CS33 (ATI) mounting slots

PA-CS33 (ATI) card may be mounted in

slots 12 and/or 23.

• LT cable connectors

Use LT5 connector when the PA-CS33

card is mounted in slot 12. When the card

is mounted in slot 23, use LT11 connector.

• LT cable Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows for PA-CS33 card.

No.

Backplane

22212019181716151413111009080706050403020100 2312

LT5

PIM

Universal Slots Universal Slots

Front View

LT11

PIM LT11 LT5

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

LEAD

NAME

No.

LEAD

NAME

BN4800

BN4820

TAS1B

BN4810

TAS0B

BN4830

BN4801

BN4821

TAS1A

BN4811

TAS0A

BN4831

For DESK CONSOLE #0

For DESK CONSOLE #1

For DESK CONSOLE #0

For DESK CONSOLE #1

LT Connector

MUX

PA-CS33(ATI)

For ADD-ON CONSOLE #0

For ADD-ON CONSOLE #1

For ADD-ON CONSOLE #0

For ADD-ON CONSOLE #1

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 235

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-2 Cable Connection Diagram for Desk Console (Continued)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 3/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

PZ-M377

0TPWR

FALM

-48V GND

PBX

RPT

terminal

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

GND

BASEU

RPT Terminal

(PZ-M377)

ATI

(PA-CS33)

LT connector

LT Connector Cable

PBX

BN4820(-48V)

BN4821(-48V)

BN4820(-48V)

BN4821(-48V)

BN4830(-48V)

BN4831(-48V)

BN4830(-48V)

BN4831(-48V)

MDF IDF

GND

Modular Block

To Desk Console #0

To Desk Console #1

• Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following wirings at the MDF and IDF.

4321

234 5 2 3 45

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 236

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Note: When replacing Attendant Console with DESK CONSOLE, follow the procedure below:

1 Turn OFF the PWR card in the PIM.

2 Remove installation cables connected to ATT0, ATT1 and LT connectors on the ATT TERM.

3 Remove installation cables connected to the following connectors:

• RLT connector on the ATT TERM

• ATI0 and LT5, ATI1 and LT11 connectors on the PIM

4 Install DESK CONSOLE using the LT connector on the ATT TERM.

5 Turn ON the PWR card in the PIM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 4/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 237

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM

(a) When the power is supplied from the PBX

Figure 016-3 Cable Connection Diagram (When the Power Is Supplied from the PBX)

The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and DESK CONSOLE is as shown below.

When exceeding the distance above, calculate the distance referring to the next page.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 5/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Source 0.5 φ Cable 0.65 φ Cable

PBX 350 m (1,148 ft.) 500 m (1,640 ft.)

GND

BN4830

BN4831

GND

b c

PBX

ATI MDF IDF

Installation Cable

BN4820

BN4821

(–48V)

BN4820

BN4821

BN4830

BN4831

RPT1

DESK CONSOLE

6-core Modular

Rosette

6-core Modular

Rosette DESK CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 238

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. CALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE ATI CIRCUIT CARD AND MODULAR ROSETTE

The distance M in Figure 016-3 is determined by the Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and

GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the following formula:

M = a + b + c

≤

26 Ω

M: Maximum Direct–Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette

a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of A

b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of B

c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of C

Example of Calculation

a, b, and c are calculated by the following formula:

Note: You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formula. You may use cable lengths in

feet, yards, or whatever unit you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of

length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot.

u: Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m)

v: Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m)

w: Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m)

x: Cable length (m) in the range of A

y: Cable length (m) in the range of B

z: Cable length (m) in the range of C

NAP-200-016

Sheet 6/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

c = w (Ω/m) × z (m)

2+w (Ω/m) × z (m)

Resistance of –48V cables Resistance of GND cables

Number of –48V cables Number of GND cables

a = u (Ω/m) × x (m)

2+u (Ω/m) × x (m)

Resistance of –48V cables Resistance of GND cables

Number of –48V cables Number of GND cable

b = v (Ω/m) × y (m)

2+v (Ω/m) × y (m)

Resistance of –48V cables Resistance of GND cables

Number of –48V cables Number of GND cables

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 239

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(b) When using Local Power Supply Note

Note: When using local power supply, DESK CONSOLE cannot be used in case of power failure.

Figure 016-4 Cable Connection Diagram (When Using Local Power Supply)

The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and DESK CONSOLE is as shown below.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 7/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Source 0.5 φCable 0.65 φCable

Local Power Supply 1,200 m (3,937 ft.) 1,500 m (4,921 ft.)

PBX

ATI

MDF IDF

Installation Cable

DESK CONSOLE

6-core Modular

Rosette

6-core Modular

Cable

DESK CONSOLE

Installation CableInstallation

Cable

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 240

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-5 Cable Connection Diagram for DESK CONSOLE Modular Block

NAP-200-016

Sheet 8/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.

Modular Jack

Bottom View

DESK CONSOLE

PAGE

(8-core)

LINE

(6-core)

REC

(8-core)

6-core Modular Cable 6-core Modular Block IDF/MDF

Viewed from direction

to be inserted

1 2 3 4 5 6

DESK CONSOLE

Transformer Surge

Protection

DC/DC

Convertor

GND

–48V/–24V

Desk Console

Modular Jack 6-core Modular Cable

6-core Modular Block

GND

Ax Note

Bx Note

GND

IDF/MDF

Note: x represents 2 or 3.

BN48×0(–48V)

BN48×1(–48V)

GND

BN48×0 (–48V)

Ax Note

Bx Note

GND

BN48×1(–48V)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 241

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. MOUNTING OF HEADSET (OPTIONAL)

The Headset cable connects to one of the modular jacks (HAND H/S 0 or H/S 1) on the bottom of DESK

CONSOLE.

Figure 016-6 Headset

NAP-200-016

Sheet 9/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Voice Tube

HAND

H/S0

H/S1

Note: In daily use, use Quick Disconnect when connecting/disconnecting the Headset.

Slide

Closing

Clip

Quick Disconnect

PIN1 TX

2 RX

3 RX

4 TX

PIN1

(+)

(–)

Modular Plug Note

Slide

Ear Pad

Slide

Head Band

Capsule Unit

(Microphone and

Speaker)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 242

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. MOUNTING OF HANDSET (OPTIONAL)

The Handset cable connects to the modular jack (HAND H/S 0) on the bottom of DESK CONSOLE.

(a) When mounting at the left side of DESK CONSOLE (Standard)

Figure 016-7 Mounting of Handset (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 10/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

1. Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.

(DESK CONSOLE side)(Handset side)

Handset code

Hole

Side View

Alarm

LDN TIE Busy ATND ANANS Recall

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC

PAGE

Start

REC

Night

Postion Busy

Mute

DEST

SRC

DEF

ABC

L 6

L 5

L 4

L 3

L 2

L 1

MNO

JKL

GHI

WXYZ

TUV

PQRS

Cancel

Talk

AnswerHoldRelease

Postion Availtable Postion Busy Nighty

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 243

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-7 Mounting of Handset (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 11/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

2. Connect the Handset code to HAND H/S0 connector as shown below (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Top View Bottom View

H/S1

HAND

H/S0

Handset code

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 244

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-7 Mounting of Handset (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 12/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Mount the Handset Support to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

Handset Support

projection

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 245

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(b) When mounting at the right side of DESK CONSOLE

Figure 016-8 Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 13/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Screw (1)

Screw (5)

Screw (4)

Screw (4) Screw (3)

Screw (3)

Screw (2)

Handset

Metal Plate

Handset

When mounting at the left sideWhen mounting at the right side

Turn over the metal plate.

DESK CONSOLE

Hole

Handset code

(DESK CONSOLE side) (Handset side)

Side View

2. Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.

1. Remove the metal plate from the Handset, turn it over, and mount it to the Handset again.

Refer to the figure below.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 246

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-8 Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 14/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

3. Connect the Handset code to HAND H/S0 connector as shown below (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Bottom view Top View

Code HAND

H/S0

H/S1

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 247

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-8 Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 15/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Mount the Handset Support to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

Handset Support

projection

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 248

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

5. CONNECTION OF RECORDING EQUIPMENT

The following are required for using recording function:

• The RECC circuit card

• Recording Equipment

• 8-core Line Cable

• Rosette

An RECC card (PA-M87) connects DESK CONSOLEs and recording equipment in the following combinations:

• Six DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment × 1 set

• Three DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment × 2 set

Figure 016-9 RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram

NAP-200-016

Sheet 16/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

50FLT-CHAMP

CABLE

Note 1: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.

Note 2: One recording equipment can be shared with multiple RECC cards.

Note 3: When sharing one recording equipment with multiple RECC cards, multiple connection of ZA and

ZB terminals is required.

DESK CONSOLE MDF

Installation Cable

8-core Line Cable PIM

RECC

card

Front

Recording

Equipment

8-pin Modular Connector

8-core Line Cable

Rosette

MDF

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

L0B

T0A

T0B

Note 1

Note 3

Circuit Card Front Connector

PIM

Telephone

side leads

Note 1 C.O. line

side leads

8-pin Modular Connector

Note 2

L0A

Rosette

Recording

Equipment

PIM

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

REC

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 249

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(a) When using three DESK CONSOLEs and one recorder Note 1

Note 1: Switch settings of SW10, SW12 and SW13 on the PA-M87 card are required. For switch setting and con-

nector lead accommodation, refer to the NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual.

Figure 016-10 Three DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment

NAP-200-016

Sheet 17/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Note 2: Refer to Figure 016-9 ”RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram” for cable connection.

Note 3: Connections of Circuit 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0.

Note 4: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.

DESK CONSOLE

Note 2

MDF

Note 2

PIM

RECC

card

Circuit 0

Note 3

Front Connector

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

Circuit 3

Circuit 4

Circuit 5

L1A

L1B

T1A

T1B

C.O. line side

leads

Telephone side

leads

Recording

Equipment

Recording

Equipment

Note 4

C.O. line side

leads

Telephone side

leads

Note 4

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 250

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(b) When using six DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment Note 1

Note 1: Switch settings of SW10, SW12 and SW13 on the PA-M87 card are required. For switch setting and con-

nector lead accommodation, refer to the NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual.

Figure 016-11 Six DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment

NAP-200-016

Sheet 18/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Note 2: Refer to Figure 016-9 ”RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram” for cable connection.

Note 3: Connections of Circuit 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0.

Note 4: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.

DESK CONSOLE

Note 2

MDF

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

Circuit 3

Circuit 4

Circuit 5

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

Recording

Equipment C.O. line side

leads

Telephone side

leads

PIM

Front Connector

RECC

card

Note 2

Circuit 0

Note 4

Note 3

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 251

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

6. 8-CORE LINE CABLE (INSTALLATION CABLE)

Figure 016-12 8-core Line Cable

NAP-200-016

Sheet 19/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Note 1: Cut the cable in proper length. Attach the modular connector to both sides of the 8-core line ca-

ble using installation tool.

Note 2: Be sure to check the polarity of pin numbers 7 (LA) (+) and 8 (LB) (–).

Speech

Not used

Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)

Recording Lamp Signal (+)

Recording Lamp Signal (–)

–

LA (Note 2)

LB (Note 2)

8-pin Modular Connector

(Rosette side)

8-pin Modular Connector

(DESK CONSOLE side)

Note 1

8-core Line Cable (Installation Cable)

Pin No.

12345678

LEAD NAME MEANING

Pin No.

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 252

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

7. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER (OPTIONAL)

The AC-DC adapter is required when the power supply from the distant PBX is not available.

Figure 016-13 Connection of AC-DC Adapter

NAP-200-016

Sheet 20/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

The connector for the AC-DC adapter is on the rear side of DESK CONSOLE.

AC-DC Adapter ( )

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 253

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

8. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE (FOR HOTEL SYSTEM)

ADD-ON CONSOLE is used in the Hotel System.

1. Cable Connection Diagram

(a) Cable Connection Diagram of Add-On Console (When the power is supplied from the PBX)

Figure 016-14 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram (When the Power Is Supplied from the PBX)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 21/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

GND

BN4810

BN4811

GND

b c

PBX

ATI MDF IDF

Installation Cable

BN4800

BN4801

(–48V)

BN4800

BN4801

BN4810

BN4811

RPT1

ADD-ON CONSOLE

6-core Modular

Rosette

6-core Modular

Rosette ADD-ON CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 254

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(b) Cable Connection Diagram of Add-On Console (When using Local Power Supply) Note

Note: When using local power supply, DESK CONSOLE cannot be used in case of power failure.

Figure 016-15 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram (When Using Local Power Supply)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 22/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

PBX

ATI

MDF IDF

Installation Cable

ADD-ON CONSOLE

6-core Modular

Rosette

6-core Modular

Cable

ADD-ON CONSOLE

Installation CableInstallation

Cable

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 255

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-16 Cable Connection Diagram for Add-On Console Modular Block

NAP-200-016

Sheet 23/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.

Modular Jack

Bottom View

ADD-ON CONSOLE

LINE

(6-core)

6-core Modular Cable 6-core Modular Block IDF/MDF

Viewed from direction

to be inserted

1 2 3 4 5 6

ADD-ON CONSOLE

Transformer Surge

Protection

DC/DC

Convertor

GND

–48V/–24V

Add-On Console

Modular Jack 6-core Modular Cable

6-core Modular Block

GND

Ax Note

Bx Note

GND

IDF/MDF

Note: x represents 0 or 1.

BN48×0(–48V)

BN48×1(–48V)

GND

BN48×0(–48V)

Ax Note

Bx Note

GND

BN48×1(–48V)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 256

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

9. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE

(a) When mounting at the right side of DESK CONSOLE

Figure 016-17 Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 24/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

L 6

L 5

L 4

L 3

L 2

L 1

1 2

ABC

DEF

MNO

JKL

GHI

WXYZ

TUV

PQRS

Cancel

Talk

SRC

Answer

DEST

Release Hold

Position Busy

Night

PAGE REC

Start Mute

TFRecallNANSADMBusyTIELDN

Alarm Position Available

HWC HP DD GST LT ICPT

TRKSL SVC SC

DDC

WUS

WUR DDR RCR MWR STS

DDS RCS MWS

HWS BV

MR CLR

TG1 TG6

TG7

TG8

TG9

TG10TG5

TG4

TG3

TG2

Enter

Clear

Exit

TRKSL SVC SC

DDC

WUS

WUR DDR RCR MWR STS

DDS RCS MWS

HWS BV

MR CLR TG1 TG6

TG7

TG8

TG9

TG10TG5

TG4

TG3

TG2

Enter

Clear

Exit

Bottom View Top View

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 257

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-17 Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 25/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Mount the ADD-ON CONSOLE to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

Projection

ADD-ON CONSOLE

DESK CONSOLE

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 258

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(b) When mounting at the left side of DESK CONSOLE

Figure 016-18 Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 26/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

L 6

L 5

L 4

L 3

L 2

L 1

Cancel

Talk

SRC

Answer

DEST

Release Hold

Position

Night

PAGE REC

Start Mute

TFRecallNANSADMBusyTIELDN

Alarm

Position

HWC HP DD GST LT ICPT

TRKSL SVC SC

DDC

WUS

WUR DDR RCR MWR STS

DDS RCS MWS

HWS BV

MR CLR TG1 TG6

TG7

TG8

TG9

TG10TG5

TG4

TG3

TG2

Enter

Clear

Exit

1. Remove the metal plate from the ADD-ON CONSOLE, turn it over, and mount it

Turn over the metal plate.

When mounting at the right side When mounting at the left side

Screw(2)

Screw(4)

Screw(5)

Screw(1)

Screw(3)

Screw(6)

ADD-ON CONSOLE

Metal Plate Metal Plate

WXYZ

ABC

MNO

TUV

DEF

GHI

JKL

to the ADD-ON CONSOLE again. Refer to the figure below.

Available

Busy

PQRS

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 259

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 016-18 Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NAP-200-016

Sheet 27/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

TRKSL SVC SC

DDC

WUS

WUR DDR RCR MWR STS

DDS RCS MWS

HWS BV

MR CLR

TG1 TG6

TG7

TG8

TG9

TG10TG5

TG4

TG3

TG2

Enter

Clear

Exit

Top View Bottom View

2. Mount the ADD-ON CONSOLE to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

Projection

DESK CONSOLE

ADD-ON CONSOLE

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 260

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

10. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER FOR ADD-ON CONSOLE (OPTIONAL)

The AC-DC adapter is required when the power supply from the distant PBX is not available.

Figure 016-19 Connection of AC-DC Adapter for Add-On Console

NAP-200-016

Sheet 28/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

The connector for the AC-DC adapter is on the rear side of ADD-ON CONSOLE.

AC-DC Adapter ( )

Connector for AC-DC Adapter

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 261

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

11. CONFIGURATION MENU

11.1 General

Configuration Menu is used for assigning configuration data for DESK CONSOLE. The menu has the fol-

lowing items:

1. HEADSET/HANDSET

2. HEADSET TYPE

3. MUTE

4. REC CONTROL

5. PAGE CONTROL Note

6. SUP CONNECTION

7. REC VOLUME

8. BLF

9. HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP

10. 2ND RINGING

11. RINGING

Note: Do not change this data.

11.2 Selection of Configuration Item

1. Displaying Configuration Menu

NAP-200-016

Sheet 29/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 262

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(a) Turn on the Position Busy lamp.

When the Position Busy lamp is off, press the Position Busy key to turn on the Position Busy lamp

(red).

(b) Press the L2, L4, and SRC keys simultaneously.

Figure 016-20 Displaying the Configuration Menu

NAP-200-016

Sheet 30/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Alarm

LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC

PAGE

Start

REC

Night

Position Busy

Mute

DESTSRC

DEF

ABC

L 6

L 5

L 3

L 1

MNO

JKL

GHI

WXYZ

TUV

PQRS

Cancel

Talk

Answer

Hold

Release

Position Position Night

[L4 key]

[L2 key]

Available

Busy

L 4

L 2

[SRC key]

[Position Busy lamp]

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 263

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

The first page of Configuration Menu appears on the LCD. Configuration Menu has a total of four pages.

•1st Page

• 2nd Page

Note: Do not change this data.

•3rd Page

•4th Page

page, press the SRC key.

(d) When pressing the Release key, Configuration Menu disappears and the DESK CONSOLE returns to

normal operation.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 31/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x DEST: next page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET Release: exit

2: HEADSET TYPE Answer: update

3: MUTE

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC CONTROL DEST: next page

2: PAGE CONTROL Note Release: exit

3: SUP CONNECTION Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME DEST: next page

2: BLF Release: exit

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page

2: RINGING Release: exit

Answer: update

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 264

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

12. SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM

By using a numeric key, press the desired number in Configuration Menu. A menu for assigning configuration

data appears. Assign configuration data referring to “Assignment of Configuration Data” on the next page.

Figure 016-21 Selecting a Configuration Item

NAP-200-016

Sheet 32/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Alarm

LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC

PAGE

Start

REC

[SRC key]

Night

Position Busy

Mute

DEST

SRC

DEF

ABC

L 6

L 5

L 4

L 3

L 2

L 1

MNO

JKL

GHI

WXYZ

TUV

PQRS

Cancel

Talk

Answer

Hold

Release

Position Position Night

[DEST key]

[Answer key]

[Release key]

[Numeric keys]

Available Busy

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 265

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

13. ASSIGNMENT OF CONFIGURATION DATA

This section explains how to assign each configuration data. When assigning configuration data, the following

shaded keys are used.

Figure 016-22 Assigning Configuration Data

NAP-200-016

Sheet 33/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Alarm

LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC

PAGE

Start

REC

[SRC key]

Night

Position Busy

Mute

SRC

DEF

ABC

L 6

L 5

L 4

L 3

L 2

L 1

MNO

JKL

GHI

WXYZ

TUV

PQRS

Cancel

Talk

Answer

Hold

Release

Position Position Night

[Numeric keys]

Available Busy

DEST

[DEST key]

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 266

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

14. HEADSET/HANDSET

This item specifies an optional device connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.

Note: With regard to the H/S1 connector, only the Headset is connected. Accordingly, data assignment for H/S1

connector is not required.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.

1. Headset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector

2. Handset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “1: HEADSET”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 34/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[HEADSET/HANDSET] SRC: menu

*1: HEADSET

2: HANDSET

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x DEST: next page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET Release: exit

2: HEADSET TYPE Answer: update

3: MUTE

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 267

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

15. HEADSET TYPE

This item specifies the type of Headset connected to the H/S1 connector.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.

1. The type of Headset is “SUPRA”

2. The type of Headset is other than “SUPRA”

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “1: SUPRA”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 35/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[HEADSET TYPE] SRC: menu

*1: SUPRA

2: OTHER

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x DEST: next page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET Release: exit

2: HEADSET TYPE Answer: update

3: MUTE

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 268

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

16. MUTE

This item specifies On/Off setting of the mute function for the HAND H/S0 or H/S1 connector. While the mute

function is set to On, if the Mute key is pressed, the voice at the DESK CONSOLE side is not sent to the other

party.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.

1. Both H/S0 and H/S1 are set to On

2. Only H/S0 is set to On

3. Only H/S1 is set to Off

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 36/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[MUTE] SRC: menu

*1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON

2 : H/S0 ON, H/S1 OFF

3 : H/S0 OFF, H/S1 ON

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x DEST: next page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET Release: exit

2: HEADSET TYPE Answer: update

3: MUTE

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 269

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

17. REC CONTROL

This item specifies the operation mode of a recording device. The following two types of modes are available:

Manual mode

Manual mode is available when the REC circuit card is mounted in the system. When the REC key is

pressed, the system starts recording and the REC lamp lights. When the REC key is pressed again, the re-

cording stops and the REC lamp goes off.

Automatic mode

In Automatic mode, a dedicated recording device is directly connected to the REC connector. When a call

is connected/disconnected, the system starts/ends recording automatically. Note that the REC key is not ef-

fective in Automatic mode.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

1. Manual mode

2. Automatic mode

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “1: MANUAL”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

Note: Do not change this data.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 37/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[REC CONTROL] SRC: menu

*1: MANUAL

2 : AUTO

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x DEST: next page

1: REC CONTROL Release: exit

2: PAGE CONTROL Note Answer: update

3: SUP CONNECTION

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 270

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

18. SUP CONNECTION

This item specifies whether the supervisory console is connected or not.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

1. Supervisory Console is not connected

2. Supervisory Console is connected

SRC:Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “1: NONE”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

Note: Do not change this data.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 38/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[SUP CONNECTION] SRC: menu

*1: NONE

2 : CONNECTED

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC CONTROL DEST: next page

2: PAGE CONTROL Note Release: exit

3: SUP CONNECTION Answer: update

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 271

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

19. REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT

This item specifies the recording level of the received voice from the other party. Note that the voice level at the

operator side cannot be adjusted.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

1. +2dB Up

2. 0dB (Standard level)

3. -4dB Down

4. -8dB Down

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “2: 0dB”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 39/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT] SRC: menu

1: +2dB 4: -8dB

*2: 0dB

3: -4dB

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME Release: exit

2: BLF Answer: update

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 272

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

20. BLF

This item specifies On/Off setting of the BLF function. When using BLF function, system data assignment is

also required.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

1. BLF Available

2. BLF Not available

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “2: DISABLE”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 40/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[BLF] SRC: menu

1: ENABLE

*2: DISABLE

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x DEST: next page

1: REC VOLUME Release: exit

2: BLF Answer: update

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 273

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

21. HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP

This item specifies the locations of HOLD, START and RELEASE key.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

1. Original setting

2. Swapped setting

Note: The locations of each key changes as shown below.

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “1: ORIGINAL”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 41/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP] SRC: menu

*1: ORIGINAL

2: SWAPPED

ORIGINAL SETTING SWAPPED SETTING

RELEASE START

HOLD RELEASE

START HOLD

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x DEST: next page

1: REC VOLUME Release: exit

2: BLF Answer: update

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 274

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

22. 2ND RINGING

This item specifies on/off setting of the 2nd ringing.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.

1. 2nd Ringing available

2. 2nd Ringing Not available

SRC Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “2: DISABLE”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 42/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[2ND RINGING] SRC: menu

1: ENABLE

*2: DISABLE

[CONFIG MENU P4]VER x SRC: menu

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page

2: RINGING Release: exit

Answer: update

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 275

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

23. RINGING

This item specifies on/off setting of ringing.

(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.

1. Ringing available

2. Ringing Not available

SRC Return to Configuration Menu

Note: Default setting is “1: ENABLE”.

(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

TA. When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NAP-200-016

Sheet 43/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

[2ND RINGING] SRC: menu

*1: ENABLE

2: DISABLE

[CONFIG MENU P4]VER x SRC: prev

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page

2: RINGING Release: exit

Answer: update

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 276

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

24. UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA

After assigning the configuration data, take the next step as below:

- To update the configuration data

While one of configuration menus is displayed on the LCD, press ANSWER key. (DESK CONSOLE

is automatically restarted.)

- To cancel the update

Press RELEASE key.

Figure 016-23 Updating Configuration Data

NAP-200-016

Sheet 44/44

Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and

Cable Connection

Alarm

LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC

PAGE

Start

REC

Night

Position Busy

Mute

DEST

SRC

DEF

ABC

L 6

L 5

L 4

L 3

L 2

L 1

MNO

JKL

GHI

WXYZ

TUV

PQRS

Cancel

Talk

Answer

HoldRelease

Position Position Night

[Answer key] (Update)

[Release key] (Cancel)

Available Busy

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 277

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the installation of Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) and System Message Printer

focusing on their cable connections.

1. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

NAP-200-017

Sheet 1/10

Installation of Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

START

Preparation of the MAT Set up PC, CRT Display, Printer, and so on.

Cable Connection Connect the cables between the MAT and the PBX

referring to Figures 017-1 and 017-2.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 278

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 017-1 Cabling of MAT when Using Ethernet

NAP-200-017

Sheet 2/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MAT

HUB Note

LOAD CPUOPEPMOPE WDT

RJ45

connector

Category 5

straight cable

(for 10/100M)

CPR

Category 5 straight cable

(for 10/100M)

10BASE-T (straight)

BASEU

LPM

(MGC)

PIM0

Connect a 10BASE-T (straight) cable to the RJ-45 connector on the front panel of CPR.

Note: In the case of connecting some equipment (MC, PHA, PHD, PHC, IP PAD), a switching hub is necessary to connect them

with MAT.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 279

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 017-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the MAT when Using RS-232C

NAP-200-017

Sheet 3/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CONN0

CONN1

RS-232C CA-(1)

RS-232C cable

MAT

PBX

(customer provided)

Connect the MAT using the cables (IPX 2PORT CA-A, RS-232C CA-(1), and RS-232C cable).

IOC (PX-IO00)

IPX 2PORT CA-A

(port#0 / port#1)

(port#2 / port#3)

M: Male

F: Female

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 280

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTION BY USING MODEM

Note: When the distance between PBX and the MAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal) exceeds 15 meters

(50 feet), connect them with Modems as shown in Figure 017-3.

NAP-200-017

Sheet 4/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

START

Preparation of the MAT Set up PC, CRT Display, Printer, and so on.

Preparation of the modems Set up the modems referring to its instruction book.

Cable connection Connect the cables referring to Figure 017-3.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 281

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 017-3 Cabling of MAT Using Modems

NAP-200-017

Sheet 5/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CONN0

CONN1

RS-232C CA-(3)

Installation Cable

MAT

PBX

To connect PBX and the MAT via modems, the following cables are used. RS-232C cable should be prepared

by the customer.

IOC (PX-IO00)

M: Male

F: Female

IPX 2PORT CA-A

(port#0 / port#1)

(port#2 / port#3)

RS-232C cable

(customer provided)

ANALOG

LINE

(2W/4W)

RTSRD DCDTEST

MODEM

RTS RD DCD TEST

MODEM

(less than 10m (33 feet))

MODEM

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 282

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM MESSAGE PRINTER AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

Figure 017-4 Connection of System Message Printer

NAP-200-017

Sheet 6/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

START

Installing printer Install printer according to its instructions.

Cable connection Connect the cable between PBX and the dedicated

System Message Printer which is equipped with a

parallel port referring to Figure 017-4.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CONN0

CONN1

RS-232C CA-(0)

RS-232C cable

PRINTER

PBX

(customer provided)

Connect the printer using the cables (IPX 2PORT CA-A, RS-232C CA-(0), and RS-232C cable).

IOC (PX-IO00)

M: Male

F: Female

IPX 2PORT CA-A

(port#0 / port#1)

(port#2 / port#3)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 283

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 017-5 IPX 2PORT CA-A Cable

NAP-200-017

Sheet 7/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

TYP0 TYP1

IPX 2PORT CA-A

1RD RD

ST2 ST2

Cable Accommodation (A)

2CS CS

CD CD

RT RT

CI CI

DR DR

SD SD

ST1

RS RS

ER ER

ST1 ST1

G G

ST2

OR-BK1

GY-BK1

W-BK1

W-BK3

W-BK5

Y-BK3

Y-BK5

P-BK3

OR-BK4

GY-BK4

W-BK4

Y-BK4

P-BK4

OR-BK5

GY-BK5

P-BK1

Y-BK1

OR-BK2

GY-BK2

OR-BK3

GY-BK3

W-BK2

P-BK2

Y-BK2

Cable Accommodation (TYP0)

Cable Accommodation (TYP1)

Note: Line with no indication within the diagram is treated all open.

2200mm (7 feet 3 inches)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 284

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 017-6 Detail of RS-232C CA-(0)

NAP-200-017

Sheet 8/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)

TYP

DTE

Champ Connector

(Female)

25-Pin Cannon Connector

(Male)

Connect to PRT

Connect to

IPX 2PORT CA-A

TYPE-1-SD

TYPE-2-RD

TYPE-3-RS

TYPE-4-CS

TYPE-5-DR

TYPE-6-SG

TYPE-7-CD

TYPE-8-ER

TYPE-9-PB

TYPE-10-SP0

TYPE-12-SP2

TYPE-11-SP1

DTE-3-RD

TYPE-2-SD

TYPE-8-CD

TYPE

TYPE-20-ER

TYPE-7-SG

TYPE-4-RS

-5-CS

TYPE-6-DR

TYPE-11-PB

TYPE-24-ST1

TYPE-17-RT

TYPE-15-ST2

RS-232C CA-(0)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 285

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 017-7 Detail of RS-232C CA-(1)

NAP-200-017

Sheet 9/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)

TYP

Champ Connector

(Female)

25-Pin Cannon Connector

(Female)

Connect to

RS-232C Cable

Connect to

IPX 2PORT CA-A

TYPE-1-SD

TYPE-2-RD

TYPE-3-RS

TYPE-4-CS

TYPE-5-DR

TYPE-6-SG

TYPE-7-CD

TYPE-8-ER

TYPE-9-PB

TYPE-10-SP0

TYPE-12-SP2

TYPE-11-SP1

DTE-3-RD

TYPE-2-SD

TYPE-8-CD

TYPE

TYPE-20-ER

TYPE-7-SG

TYPE-4-RS

-5-CS

TYPE-6-DR

TYPE-11-PB

TYPE-24-ST1

TYPE-17-RT

TYPE-15-ST2

DTE

RS-232C CA-(1)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 286

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 017-8 Detail of RS-232C CA-(3)

NAP-200-017

Sheet 10/10

Installation of the Maintenance

Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable

Connections

1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)

TYP

Champ Connector

(Female)

25-Pin Cannon Connector

(Male)

Connect to MODEM

Connect to

IPX 2PORT CA-A

TYP-1-SD

TYP-2-RD

TYP-3-RS

TYP-4-CS

TYP-5-DR

TYP-6-SG

TYP-7-CD

TYP-8-ER

TYP-10-SP0

TYP-11-SP2

TYP-12-SP1

DCE-2-SD

DCE-3-RD

DCE-4-RS

DCE-5-CS

DCE-6-DR

DCE-7-SG

DCE-8-CD

DCE-20-ER

DCE-17-RT

DCE-24-ST1

DCE-15-ST2

RS-232C CA-(3)

DTE

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 287

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This NAP explains the cable connection of SMDR equipment.

Note: The SMDR RS-232C interface specifications are:

• Synchronization — Asynchronous

• Data Speed — 9600 bps (maximum)

• Code — ASCII 7-bit + Parity Bit

• Maximum Distance — 15 meters (50 feet) without Modems.

NAP-200-018

Sheet 1/4

Connections of SMDR

START

Installation of SMDR equipment

Cable connection Connect the cables, referring to Figure 018-1.

• Refer to Figure 018-3 when the length of the

cables exceeds 15 meters (49.5 feet).

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 288

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 018-1 Cabling of SMDR when Using Ethernet

NAP-200-018

Sheet 2/4

Connections of SMDR ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

HUB Note

LOAD CPUOPEPMOPE WDT

RJ45

connector

CPR

Category 5 straight cable

(for 10/100M)

10BASE-T (straight)

BASEU

LPM

(MGC)

PIM0

Connect a 10BASE-T (straight) cable to the RJ-45 connector on the front panel of CPR.

Category 5

straight cable

(for 10/100M)

Note: In the case of connecting some equipment (MC, PHA, PHD, PHC, IP PAD), a switching hub is necessary to connect them

with SMDR.

SMDR

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 289

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 018-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the SMDR when Using RS-232C

NAP-200-018

Sheet 3/4

Connections of SMDR ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CONN0

RS-232C CA-(1)

RS-232C cable

SMDR

PBX

(customer provided)

Connect SMDR using the cables (IPX 2PORT CA-A, RS-232C CA-(1), and RS-232C cable).

IOC (PX-IO00)

M: Male

F: Female

IPX 2PORT CA-A

(port#0 / port#1)

CONN1

(port#2 / port#3)

CHAPTER 3 ND-71548 (E)

Page 290

Issue 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Figure 018-3 Connection of SMDR by Using MODEM

NAP-200-018

Sheet 4/4

Connections of SMDR ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CONN0

CONN1

RS-232C CA-(3)

Installation Cable

SMDR

PBX

To connect PBX and the SMDR via modems, the following cables are used. RS-232C cable should be prepared

by the customer.

IOC (PX-IO00)

M: Male

F: Female

IPX 2PORT CA-A

(port#0 / port#1)

(port#2 / port#3)

RS-232C cable

(customer provided)

ANALOG

LINE

(2W/4W)

RTSRD DCD

TEST

MODEM

RTSRD DCD

TEST

MODEM

(less than 10m (33 feet))

MODEM

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 291

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM STARTUP

1. GENERAL

This Chapter describes the initial startup procedure and the diagnosis procedure after installing PBX. Before be-

ginning the system startup, thoroughly read Section 2., “PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM

STARTUP” of this Chapter, and observe the precautions while performing the system startup. Neglecting the

precautions may delay the system cutover or may damage the system equipment.

2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP

1. The system is to be started up using the basic system data.

2. When starting up the system, it is necessary to start up the MAT.

3. The following preparatory steps must be completed before the tests are executed:

• All circuit card switches should be correctly set.

• Flat cables should be securely connected.

• CHAMP connectors should be securely connected.

• All connector-ended cables should be secured at both ends.

• The –48 V (Blue) and G (Red) power supply leads must be correctly connected.

• An earth lead (less than 10 ohms) must be connected to the communication ground.

• The installer should confirm at this point that all installation steps have been completed.

4. Do not place any object (a tool, manual, etc.) on top of the Module Group or within a unit (module).

• An object such as a book, when placed on top of the Module Group, will adversely affect heat dissipa-

tion from the Module Group.

• If an object placed on top of the Module Group or left within a unit (module) falls out, it may cause

backplane pins, circuit cards, etc. to short-circuit.

5. Before initially turning ON power to the system, read the Power On Procedure (NAP-200-019).

• Until the normal operation of all circuit cards has been confirmed, leave power ON only during testing.

6. Observe the temperature in the switch room.

• Does the air-conditioning function properly at night?

• Does the temperature fluctuate constantly because people go in and out frequently, or rise above the rec-

ommended level due to excessive heat being generated by any single piece of equipment?

• The fan should be left ON constantly until the installation tests are completed.

7. A floppy disk (FD) copy of the programmed Office Data should be created. If the backup is not stored, and

the contents of the Data Memory are accidentally altered or destroyed, all the Office Data will have to be

programmed again.

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 292

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

8. If any portion of the Office Data (especially data related to ringing patterns) has been changed via com-

mands “ARTD”, “AKYD”, or “ASYD”, the system must be initialized and test must be performed to verify

the data.

9. After the system is initialized, perform the following:

• Set the current date and time using MAT command “ATIM”.

• When the system is initialized, the system begins operating with Day Mode. To change over to Night

Mode, depress the NITE key on the Attendant Console.

• If no Attendant Console is equipped, the system begins operating with Night Mode.

10. The following cross connections must be made at the MDF:

• Complete necessary cross connections by extracting the related circuit cards from their mounting slots

or by disconnecting the circuits with a cut plug if test springs are in use.

• If the connection to a Dterm is made incorrectly, the electronic fuse of the circuit card may be damaged.

(Repair Method: Correct the cross connections and flip the MB switch on the card Down-Up-Down).

• While a test is in progress, do not perform cross connections without notifying to the person conducting

the test (Ringing signal: AC 20 Hz, effective value 90 V, may be flowing through the terminals).

• Remove all temporary cross connections after the tests have been completed (If Office Data was as-

signed for test purposes, restore the original Office Data).

11. Observe the following when connecting cables:

• Before connecting or disconnecting the control cable (Front & Backplane), turn OFF power to the Mod-

ule Group (LPM / PIM etc.).

• Before connecting or disconnecting a CHAMP connector, turn OFF power to the Module Group. This

will prevent an accident from occurring in the event that a metal object such as a screw, screwdriver,

etc. accidentally contacts the backplane circuitry or pins.

• When connecting or disconnecting the connector cable of the Attendant Console, first set the MB switch

on the ATI circuit card to the UP position, then connect/disconnect the cable.

12. Precautions when Handling Circuit Cards

• When handling a circuit card, use a Field Service Kit to protect against static discharge (example: 3M

No. 8012 Portable Field Service Kit; available from NEC).

• When touching a circuit card, be sure to wear the grounded wrist strap provided with the Portable Field

Service Kit.

• Set the MB switch to the UP position and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.

• When holding a circuit card with bare hands, do not touch the component mounted side of the card or

the connector portion.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 293

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

Figure 4-1 How to handle Circuit Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

SP-234

SN1234

SP-234

SN1234

Connect ground wire to

the Earth terminal of the

frame.

Place the circuit card

on a conductive sheet.

wrist strap

PBX

conductive

sheet

wrist strap

Connector

(Contact)

Portion

Component-

Mounted Side

Set MB switch

to UP.

Card Puller

Tab

installer

When holding a circuit card with bare hands, do not touch the component mounted side of the card or

the connector portion.

07/31/02

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 294

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

• When placing a circuit card on a table or other flat surface, spread out a conductive sheet and set the card

on the sheet.

• Set the MB switch of the circuit card to the UP position and confirm its mounting slot (Note). Then insert

the card into its mounting slot.

Note: Confirm that the color of the card puller tab is the same as that of the label showing the Slot Number.

3. SYSTEM STARTUP PROCEDURE

The NAPs in the following flowchart describe the procedures for powering on, starting up the system, assigning

Office Data, and checking the startup conditions.

START

Power On: NAP-200-019

Program Install/Load: NAP-200-020

Office Data Assignment: NAP-200-021

Check of Lamp Indication and System Messages: NAP-200-022

Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU: NAP-200-023

Circuit

Card

Perform work on the conductive sheet

while wearing a grounded wrist strap.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 295

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019

Sheet 1/2

Power ON

START

Visual Inspection Check whether any pins on the backplane of each Module

are bent and cause a short.

Check whether any foreign matter such as a cleaning fluid

residue is present on the connector portion of the circuit

cards.

On each circuit card equipped with ROM (CPU, etc.),

check whether any pins of the ROM are bent or improperly

seated.

Leave all circuit cards inserted

halfway

Mount all circuit cards (including PWR Supplies) in the

Module, leaving them inserted only halfway. (They should

not be inserted into their connectors.)

Check input voltage Check insulation across the -48 V and G terminals on the

power receiving terminal of the Base Unit.

Turn ON power to the rectifier and check the voltage (DC

-48V ± 5V) and its polarity on the power receiving terminal

of the Base Unit.

Turn ON Fan Units Turn FAN UNIT ON.

Verify that air is blown upwards.

If the Fuse blows, the input polarity is reversed.

Turn OFF the FAN UNIT.

Correct polarity, replace the fuse and turn FAN UNIT ON.

Verify that the FAN blows air upwards.

Check PWR Supply Check the Power Supplies for each Module one at a time.

Check Steps:

1. Turn circuit breaker OFF and insert the PWR Supply.

2. Turn circuit breaker ON (See Note).

3. Various lamps (Green) illuminate.

4. Observe the PWR Supply for a while and confirm that

nothing abnormal (unusual smell, smoke, etc.) occurs.

5. Turn the circuit breaker ON/OFF a few times and

observe the condition.

6. Turn the circuit breaker OFF and remove the PWR

Supply.

Note: If a Module is equipped with dual PWR Supplies,

they must be turned ON/OFF.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 296

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019

Sheet 2/2

Power ON

Insert all PWR Supplies Insert all PWR Supplies into their positions.

Insertion Steps:

1. Turn each Power Supply’s circuit breaker OFF and insert

them one at a time.

2. Turn circuit breakers ON.

3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications (unusual

smell, smoke, alarm, etc.)

Insert and check Line/Trunk circuit

cards

Insert Line (16LC, etc.) and Trunk (16COT, etc.) circuit

cards into their backplane connectors one at a time and

confirm that no fuses are blown in the process.

Check Steps:

1. Set MB switch UP and insert the card.

2. Set MB switch DOWN.

3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications.

4. Set MB switch UP and remove the card.

Insert and check control system

cards

Insert control system circuit cards (TSW, MUX, etc.) one at

a time and confirm that no fuses are blown in the process.

Check Steps:

1. Set MB switch UP and insert the card.

2. Set MB switch DOWN.

3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications.

4. Set MB switch UP and remove the card.

Note: If a module contains dual PWR Supplies, they must be turned ON or OFF.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

IMG0:

IMG1:

IMG2:

IMG3:

IMG1:

PIM3

PIM1

PIM2

PIM0

Single IMG Configuration

Multiple IMG Configuration

TSWM

LPM

LPM (MGC) PIM0 PIM1 PIM2 PIM3

IMG0:

IMG1:

IMG2:

IMG3:

IMG1:

PIM3

PIM1

PIM2

PIM0

LPM (MGC) PIM0 PIM1 PIM2 PIM3

Single IMG Configuration

Multiple IMG Configuration

TSWM

LPM

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 297

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

Perform the following items for loading the program from the flash card.

Figure 020-1 Locations of Switches, OPE, and Flash Card Slot

NAP-200-020

Sheet 1/7

Program Install and Load

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPR

DSP

MBR

SENSE

POWER

STATUS

FRONT VIEW

Slot for inserting

Flash Card

Flash Card Ejector

MB (by sliding

downward, MB is

set to ON)

PZ-IO31

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

LAN

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 298

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020

Sheet 2/7

Program Install and Load

START

Flash Card Insertion Here describes the procedure for inserting a flash card into PC.

PC needs to be installed Windows 2000 and equipped with PCMCIA card

slot.

Insert Steps:

1. Insert a flash card into PC.

Note: The flash card (FLASH-ATA-320M) prepared by NEC must

be used.

2. Make sure the card icon appears in the task box, indicating PC recog-

nized the flash card successfully.

Software Merging Here describes the procedure for merging basic software and software(s).

Prepare the appropriate CDs to be installed.

Merger Steps:

1. Select "Program"→"MAT tools"→"MSVICD" to display "MSVICD"

window.

2. Select "Initial Setup" and click "Execute" button.

3. When "Step 1 Basic Software CD Copy" window displays, Insert a CD con-

taining Basic Software and select a folder to be copied in "Copy To" field.

Then click "Next" button.

4. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that making sure the path on the

screen, click "Yes" button to copy Basic Software into the folder.

5. When "Step 2 Software Merge" window displays, insert the CDs (System

Capacity License, IP Capacity License, and Softphone Client Li-

cense) to be merged with the basic software. Then click "Next" but-

ton.

Note: The merged file varies depending on the system.

6. After the merger is complete, a dialog box displays, indicating whether to

keep merging software. To merge the file again, click "Ye s " button. Other-

wise, click "No" button to exit the process.The merged file varies depending

on the system.

7. After the merger is complete, a dialog box displays, indicating whether to

keep merging software. To merge the file again, click "Ye s " button. Other-

wise, click "No" button to exit the process.

Note: When other message is displayed, refer to "ERROR MES-

SAGE LIST".

8. Click "OK" button to close the window.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 299

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020

Sheet 3/7

Program Install and Load

Software Writing Here describes the procedure for writing updated program into a flash

card. This step is performed using FLCVTR. Be careful when using

this command as following:

- Login to PC as administrator or the same level privilege.

- Do not restart the PC installing a flash card.

- Do not attach a lot of equipment (CD-R, MO, etc) to a PC.

It might cause the PC not to recognize the flash card drive.

Writing Steps:

1. Select "Program"→"MAT tools"→"FLCVTR" to display

"FLCVTR" window.

2. Click "Execute" button next to "Initial installation".

3. Select the flash card drive in "Flash Card" field, and specify the

path for the merged software in "Folder" field.

Note: When selecting the drive (partition) to be written in the

flash card, select "option"

→

"drive" to display the drive

field. Then click the drive check box.

4. Click "Set" button.

5. After "Start writing the data?" message box displays, make sure

the updated program path and the flash card drive on the mes-

sage box, then click "OK" button. It takes approximately 5

minutes to complete the data writing.

6. "Data write was completed" message box displays, click "OK"

button to close it.

Note: When other message is displayed, refer to "ERROR MESSAGE

LIST".

Flash Card

Removal

Here describes the procedure for removing a flash card from

PC.

Removal Steps:

1. Click the card icon in the task bar.

2. Select "Cancel" on the menu, and wait until the message ap-

pears.

3. Make sure the message, and push the eject button to remove the

flash card.

Note: Do not remove the flash card without this procedure. It

might damage your system.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 300

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020

Sheet 4/7

Program Install and Load

ERROR MESSAGE LIST

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ERROR MESSAGE ANSWER

Specify the flash card. Make sure the flash card drive is correctly selected.

Specify a folder. Make sure the folder is correctly specified.

The specified CD is not correct.

The process is aborted.

Make sure the appropriate CD is inserted and the path (“ICS-

BOOT.SYS” is located) is correctly specified.

The specified folder is not correct.

The process is aborted.

Make sure the appropriate CD is inserted and the path (“ICS-

BOOT.SYS” is located) is correctly specified.

The flash card is not in the normal state.

The process is aborted. Make sure the flash card has been formatted.

Flash card space is not enough.

The process is aborted. Check the program capacity to be installed.

Failed to write the data into the flash card.

The process is aborted. Check the flash card is firmly inserted in the slot.

Failed to read the data from the flash card.

The process is aborted. Check the flash card is firmly inserted in the slot.

Drive is not specified. Specify a drive (partition).

Only one drive can be specified. Make sure the one drive (partition) is selected; Do not spec-

ify more than one drive.

Failed to write the data.

The process is aborted. Make sure the folder exists.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 301

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020

Sheet 5/7

Program Install and Load

Prepare the flash card containing the program.

Make sure that all power of the PBX is off.

Insert the Flash Card into the slot.

Set the SENSE switch to "1" for loading the program on to the MEM.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Slide the MB plate downward. Insert the flash card into the slot. Return the MB plate to

the previous position.

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

Flash Card

Down up

LAN LAN LAN

Set SENSE to 1.

SENSE => 1: Program is loaded from the flash card to the MEM,

then the data memory is cleared. SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

SENSE

Set to 1.

LAN

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 302

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020

Sheet 6/7

Program Install and Load

Turn ON the PBX as follows. (Note)

Loading starts. ("LOAD" lamp lights red while the Flash Card is being accessed.)

The 7-seg LED (right side) indicates the process of the loading as follows.

Loading completes.

Set the SENSE switch to "2" on the CPU front panel.

Specify the LDM installation by using ASYDL (SYS 1

Index513).

Using AACT command, input Activation Code labeled on

the back of Basic Software CD.

Note: In the case of North America and Austria, contact

the supplier.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Turn on the CPR.

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

LAN

Turn on the PX-PW01 card(s).

Turn on the CPR#0 by pressing the PWR switch.

Turn on the CPR#1 by pressing the PWR switch. (option)

Turn on the power of the PIMs as follows:

PIM0 => PIM1 => PIM2 => PIM3

Note: CPR#1, PIM1-3 may not be used depending on the system configuration.

Flash card access

Program LOAD

Office Data LOAD

The system starts up again.

System Initialization

Accessing the flash card.

Loading the program from the flash card.

Loading the office data from the flash card.

Initializing the system.

Initializing is completed.

LED MEANING

STATUS

LED (right)

LOAD lights red. SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

LAN

When the CPU OPE lamp comes on the DSP, the loading is completed.

Set SENSE to 2.

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

SENSE

Set to 2.

LAN

SENSE => 2: On-Line mode (Restart without data memory clear)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 303

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021

Sheet 1/2

Assignment of Office Data

START

Start up the MAT

Enter basic data Assign the following data via the MAT for each of the

office data programming sheet.

“ATIM”: Assignment of Date and Time

“ASYD” (SYS 1, 2, & 3) /ASYDL (SYS 1 & 2):

System Data assignment

“ASYD”: Assign SYS1, INDEX 92, bit 3=1

“AUNT”: Unit Data assignment

“ADTM”: Assign TCP/IP Module data.

Save basic data Save the above data onto the Flash Card using the

“MEM_HDD” Command.

Initialization

(with office Data Loading)

Make sure that the SENSE switch on the CPU Front

Panel has been set to “2”.

Set the keys on the TOPU as follows:

• PROGRAM KEY→NON LOAD

• SYSTEM DATA KEY→LOAD

Press CPURST button on the CPU Front Panel.

Clear the alarm by pressing ALM RST button on the

TOPU.

Assign Office Data Assign data according to the office data programming

sheet.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 304

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021

Sheet 2/2

Assignment of Office Data

Save Office Data onto Flash Card Save the Office Data onto the Flash Card from the MEM

using the “MEM_HDD” command.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 305

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-022

Sheet 1/5

Check of Lamp Indications and System

Messages

START

Check lamp indications on Line/

Trunk circuit cards

Check lamp indications on each of the assigned Line/

Trunk circuit cards.

OPE lamp (G): ON

BL lamp (R): OFF

If the lamp indications are other than above, investigate

per Chapter 6: “FAULT RECOVERY DURING

TESTS.”

Check lamp indications on control

system circuit cards

The OPE lamps (G) are shown in Figure 022-1 through

Figure 022-4.

If any alarm lamp illuminates, check switch settings on

the circuit card on that module, control cable

connections (Front & Backplane), and Office Data

assignments.

Confirm that no alarm lamps (R) / (Y)

are illuminating on the TOPU

As for the TOPU (Top Unit) lamp indications, refer to

the System Operations and Maintenance Manual.

Check System Messages Display System Messages using MAT command

“DFTD.”

END

If a message indicating a fault is displayed, investigate

and recover the fault, referring to the System Operations

and Maintenance Manual.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 306

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

Figure 022-1 LED Indications in Normal Operation (Single IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-022

Sheet 2/5

Check of Lamp Indications and System

Messages

01 03 04 05 06 07 08

PWR0

PWR1

EMA (PX-PC00-A)

IOC (PX-IO00)

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM (MGC)

BSCM

BASEU

FANU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

MUX (PH-PC36)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

MUX (PH-PC36)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

MUX (PH-PC36)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

TSW (PH-SW10)

TSW ACT

MUX ACT

PLO ACT

TSW ACT

MUX ACT

MUX ACT MUX ACT

PLO ACT

CPUOPE PIMOPE

CPU #0 => ACT

TSW #0 => ACT

PLO #0 => ACT

CPUOPE

PIMOPE

Legend

: Lamp is ON (Green) : Lamp is Flashing (Green) : Lamp is OFF

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD

CPUOPE PIMOPE

WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD

CPUOPE PIMOPE

WDT

ACT

STBY

LAN

The figure shows the LED indications on a fully expanded system as an example.

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 307

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

Figure 022-2 LED Indications of IMG0 in Normal Operation (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-022

Sheet 3/5

Check of Lamp Indications and System

Messages

01 03 04 05 06 07 08

PWR0

PWR1

EMA (PX-PC00-A)

IOC (PX-IO00)

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM (MGC)

BSCM

BASEU

FANU

PWR

ON MJ MN MJ MN SUP/IP

SYSTEM ALM

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

MUX (PH-PC36)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

MUX (PH-PC36)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

MUX (PH-PC36)

00 01 02 03 13 14

PWR0

PWR1

MUX ACT MUX ACT

MUX (PH-PC36)

IMG0

CPUOPE PIMOPE

CPU #0 => ACT

TSW #0 => ACT

PLO #0 => ACT

CPUOPE

PIMOPE

Legend

: Lamp is ON (Green) : Lamp is Flashing (Green) : Lamp is OFF

ACT

STBY

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD

CPUOPE PIMOPE

WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD

CPUOPE PIMOPE

WDT

LAN

The figure shows the LED indications on a fully expanded system as an example.

07/31/02

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 308

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

Figure 022-3 LED Indications of IMG1 in Normal Operation (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-022

Sheet 4/5

Check of Lamp Indications and System

Messages

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

DLKC (PH-PC20)

GT (PA- GT0 9)

TSW 00 (PH-SW12)

TSW 01 (PH-SW12)

TSW 02 (PH-SW12)

TSW 03 (PH-SW12)

TSW 10 (PH-SW12)

TSW 11 (PH-SW12)

TSW 12 (PH-SW12)

TSW 13 (PH-SW12)

PLO

(RES)

GT (PA- GT0 9)

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TSWM

BASEU

FANU

FRONT VIEW

: Lamp is ON : Lamp is OFF

Legend

System State

IMG1

TSW 0 -> ACT

PLO 0 -> ACT

DLKC 0 -> ACT

2322

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

This figure shows the LED indications on a fully expanded IMG1 system as an example. Note that this example

assumes that all of the four IMGs are used in an integrated multimedia exchange service.

FRONT

DLKC

OPE/MB

PLO

FRONT

ACT

TSW

FRONT

TSW ACT

MBR

FRONT

OPE/MB

MBR

MUX

FRONT

MUX ACT

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 309

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

Figure 022-4 LED Indications of IMG 2/3 in Normal Operation (example) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-022

Sheet 5/5

Check of Lamp Indications and System

Messages

This figure shows the LED indications on a fully expanded system of IMG 2/3 as an example.

1314

MUX(PH-PC36)

1314

MUX(PH-PC36)

1314

MUX(PH-PC36)

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

DUMMY

BASEU

FANU

FRONT VIEW

: Lamp is ON

IMG 2/3

: Lamp is OFF

TSW 0 -> ACT

FRONT

MUX

MUX ACT

System State

Legend

CHAPTER 4 ND-71548 (E)

Page 310

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

Test Outline: The System has Alarm Lamps on the TOPU. Figure 023-1 shows the Alarm

Lamps on the TOPU. For more information about each lamp, see the

NEAX2400 IPX System Operations and Maintenance Manual.

Figure 023-1 Alarm Lamps on the TOPU

Note: SMJ and SMN are used in multiple IMG configuration only.

NAP-200-023

Sheet 1/2

Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PWR

ON MJ MN SUP

GRR

SMJ SMN

ALM

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 4

Page 311

Issue 2

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-023

Sheet 2/2

Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU

START

Test of MJ (MAJOR) Lamp Set the circuit breakers of the Power Supplies (PWR0, 1)

in a PIM to OFF (About 10 seconds later, set the circuit

breaker(s) to ON again.

Confirm that the MJ lamp (red) on TOPU turns ON.

Stop the alarm indication by pressing ALM RST button

on TOPU.

Test of MN (MINOR) Lamp Take an act side RGU Fuse out of the PWR card.

Confirm that the MN lamp (red) on TOPU turns ON.

Stop the alarm indication by pressing ALM RST button

on TOPU.

Test of SUP (SUPERVISORY)

Lamp

On the EMA circuit card, flip the MB switch DOWN-

UP-DOWN

Confirm that the SUP lamp (yellow) on TOPU turns ON.

Stop the alarm indication by pressing ALM RST button

on TOPU.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 312

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

1. HOW TO ENTER DATA IN THE TEST CHECK COLUMN

Each NAP in this Chapter has check column for test result entry for each test item (see Figure 5-1). This para-

graph explains the method of entering test result into the check column concerned using Figure 5-1 as an exam-

ple.

1. Method of Entry

Each check column consists of two sections (“PROVIDED” and “CHECK”). If the equipment or service

feature pertaining to the test item is provided in the system, enter “*” in the PROVIDED section. At the

time of performing installation tests, the test item with “*” in the PROVIDED section must be tested with-

out exception.

In the “CHECK” column, enter the results of each test as follows:

• When the test result is good: “√”

• When the test result is no good: “−”

2. Fault Recovery

If a fault is detected as a result of an installation test, enter “F” into the related check sheet. After finishing

all tests in the same category, be sure to repair the fault before proceeding to the next test.

3. Entry into Check Column after Fault Recovery

After completing fault recovery work, a test must be performed to confirm that the fault has been corrected.

If the result of this confirmation indicates that the fault has been corrected, enter “√” next to the “−” entered

previously. This entry should appear as: “− √”.

BASIC CONNECTION TEST

- DT Connection (page 315)

- Station-to-Station (page 316)

SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST

- Changeover (page 318)

- Initialization (page 326)

- Circuit Card Initialization (page 328)

OVERALL TEST

- 3-Party Conference (page 341)

- Announcement (page 342)

- Digital Announcement (page 343)

- Paging Access (page 344)

- Paging Transfer (page 345)

- Radio Paging (page 347)

- Howler & Ringing Signal (page 348)

SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST

- RST Card (ORT) (page 330)

- ATTCON (page 332)

- Line (LC, ELC, DLC, Card) (page 333)

- COT, TLT, DTI - outgoing (page 334)

- COT, TLT, DTI - incoming (page 337)

- Direct-In Termination (page 339)

- RST Card (SND) (page 340)

- C.O. Line - outgoing (page 351)

- C.O. Line - incoming (page 352)

- CCIS - outgoing (page 353)

- CCIS - incoming (page 355)

- Alternate Routing (page 356)

- Tandem Connection (page 358)

- PAD (page 360)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 313

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 5-1 Example of Entry to Test Check Column

• This example is NAP-200-023: DT Connection Test

When “*” is already printed in the “PROVIDED” section, the item concerned

is a basic function of the system. Test the item without exception.

When “PROVIDED” section is blank, the installer should enter “*”

mark as per the Job Specification.

The item with “*” must be tested without exception.

Check whether OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on RST circuit cards.

Check whether OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on LC circuit cards.

Lift handset.

Confirm DT (Dial Tone).

Check whether the Busy lamp (R) is turning ON for the

connected ORT and LC.

Keep listening to DT for about 12 seconds.

Confirm that DT changes to Reorder Tone (ROT).

Keep listening to ROT for about 30 seconds.

When System Data (SYS1,

INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 0)

are assigned.

Confirm that ROT changes to

“no tone.”

When System Data (SYS1,

INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 1 or

b3 = 1, b4 = 0) are assigned.

Confirm that howler tone is

heard after ROT stops.

(Analog Ports only)

Hang up and release the connection.

These are the

Test Check

Columns, the

left column is

“PROVIDE”

column and the

right columns is

the “CHECK”

columns.

STAR

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 314

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

2. BASIC CONNECTION TEST

2.1 Outline

After the system has been started up, establish some basic connections and verify that the system operates nor-

mally.

2.2 Basic Connection Test Procedure

Perform tests on the operations of the processors and the system by referring to the NAP Number indicated to

the right of each item in the following flowchart. If an operation cannot be performed satisfactorily, perform the

necessary repair procedure(s) based on Chapter 6, ”FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS”.

START

DT (Dial Tone) Connection Test: NAP-200-024

Station-to-Station Connection Test: NAP-200-025

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 315

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-024

Sheet 1/1

DT (Dial Tone) Connection Test

START

Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the RST circuit cards.

Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the LC circuit cards.

Lift handset.

Confirm DT (Dial Tone).

Check whether the Busy lamp (R) is turning ON for the connected ORT and LC.

Keep listening to DT for about 12 seconds.

Confirm that DT changes to Reorder Tone (ROT).

Keep listening to ROT for about 30 seconds.

When System Data (SYS1,

INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 0) are

assigned.

Confirm that ROT changes to “no tone”.

When System Data (SYS1,

INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 1 or

b3 = 1, b4 = 0) are assigned.

Confirm that howler tone is heard after ROT

stops. (Analog Ports only)

Hang up and release the connection.

END

LC ORTA

DT, ROT

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 316

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025

Sheet 1/1

Station to Station Connection Test

START

Confirm that a connection can be established between Station A and Station B.

Station A goes off-hook.

Station A hears DT.

Station A dials the station number of Station B.

Station A confirms that DT stops when the first digit has been dialed.

Station A confirms that RBT (Ring Back Tone) is heard after dialing ends.

Station B hears ringing on the telephone set.

Station B lifts handset and answers the call.

After answering, both Stations A and B confirm that they can talk with each

other.

Stations A and B hang up. The connection is released.

END

ORT

Station A

DT, ROT

Station B

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 317

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

3. SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST

3.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed on the restart processing (reinitialization) and system changeover functions which en-

able the system to restart its operations and services.

3.2 System Initialized Test Procedure

The System Changeover Test and Initialization Tests are to be performed per the NAP Numbers indicated to the

right of each item in the following flowchart.

START

System Changeover Test: NAP-200-026

System Initialization Test: NAP-200-027

Circuit Card Initialization Test: NAP-200-028

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 318

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Test Outline:

Tests are performed to see if a changeover of the dual systems (Control Systems and Speech Path Systems) of the

PBX can be executed.

NAP-200-026

Sheet 1/8

System Changeover Test Single IMG and Multiple IMG Configuration

START

Perform a Control System Changeover test by switch operations

Control System change-

over via MBR switch on

the DSP (PZ-DK237)

card

On the DSP card whose OPE lamp is turning ON, flip the

“MBR” switch DOWN→UP→DOWN (OFF→ON→OFF).

The lamp indication of the DSP changes to “DSP in STBY

mode” in Figure 026-1.

System message “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in

succession.

CPU changeover via

switch (Forced Change-

over)

Designate CPU changeover via the “CPU SEL” switch on

the EMA (PX-PC00-A) card.

• CPU SEL UP Position: No. 1 ACT

• CPU SEL DOWN Position: No. 0 ACT

System Messages “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in

succession.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 319

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 026-1 How to Perform a Control System Changeover (Single IMG Configuration)

Figure 026-2 How to Perform a Control System Changeover (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-026

Sheet 2/8

System Changeover Test Single IMG and Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

DSP in ACT mode DSP in STBY mode

MBR

Flip the MBR switch on

the DSP.

Legend

: Lamp is ON (Green) : Lamp is OFF

: Lamp is Flashing

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

SYSTEM SELECT 0

SYSTEM SELECT 1

SYSTEM SELECT 2

CPURST

POWER

SENSE MBR

STATUS

IMG

132

IMG

LOAD CPUOPE PIMOPE WDT

DSP in ACT mode DSP in STBY mode

MBR

Flip the MBR switch on

the DSP.

Legend

: Lamp is ON (Green) : Lamp is OFF

: Lamp is Flashing

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 320

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 026-3 LEDs and Switches on TSW/MUX

NAP-200-026

Sheet 3/8

System Changeover Test Single IMG Configuration

Perform a TSW system changeover test by means of switch operations. (Refer to Figure 026-3)

TSW changeover via

switch.

On TSW (PH-SW10) card whose TSW ACT lamp is

turning ON, flip the TSW MBR switch DOWN-UP-

DOWN.

System Messages “7-E,” “7-F” and “1-T” are displayed

in succession.

Perform a PLO system changeover test, if TSW (PH-SW10) is provided in dual.

On TSW card whose PLO ACT lamp is turning ON, flip

the PLO MBR switch DOWN-UP-DOWN.

System message “7-G” and “7-H” are displayed in

succession.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

FRONT VIEW

TSW (PH-SW10) MUX (PH-PC36)

TSW ACT

MUX ACT

PLO ACT

TSW MBR

PLO MBR

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 321

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026

Sheet 4/8

System Changeover Test Multiple IMG Configuration

Perform a Speech Path system changeover test by switch operations. (Refer to Figure 026-4)

TSW changeover via

switch

On the active GT (PH-GT09) card whose OPE/MB lamp is

illuminating, flip the MBR switch DOWN-UP-DOWN.

Make sure that the active Speech Path system has been

changed over to the STBY mode. (Check all the related

circuit cards, which were formerly active, have been totally

changed over to the STBY mode.

Analyze the system messages “7-E,” “7-F” and “1-T” to be

displayed automatically.

Perform a PLO system changeover test by switch operations. (Refer to Figure 026-3)

PLO changeover via

switch.

On PLO card on which ACT/OPE lamp is illuminating, flip

the MB switch DOWN-UP-DOWN.

Note

Make sure that the active PLO system has been changed over

to the STBY mode (ACT/OPE lamp goes OFF).

END

Analyze the system messages “7-U” and “7-V” to be

displayed automatically.

Note: As for the PLO, any of the following cards can be

used:

• PH-CK16

• PH-CK17

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Circuit Cards to be affected

• TSW (PH-SW12)

• DLKC (PH-PC20)

• MUX (PH-PC36)

Note: Refer to Figure 026-4.

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 322

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 026-4 LEDs and Switches for System Changeover (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-026

Sheet 5/8

System Changeover Test Multiple IMG Configuration ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MUX (PH-PC36)

MUX ACT

TSW (PH-SW12)

GT (PH-GT09)

OPE/MB

MBR

DLKC (PH-PC20)

OPE/MB

FRONT VIEW

TSW ACT

TSW MBR

PLO Note 1

ACT

Note 1: PH-CK16/PH-CK17

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 323

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 026-5 System Block Diagram (TSW and MUX) (Single IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-026

Sheet 6/8

System Changeover Test Single IMG Configuration

LC/TRK

MUX

TSW/INT/PLO

CPU

LANI

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

TSW/INT

PLO

LVDS

MUX

CFT

From EMA

MUSIC

MUX

LC/TRK

PHSW10

DTI DCS

CPR

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 324

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 026-6 System Block Diagram (GT and Other Controlling Blocks) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-026

Sheet 7/8

System Changeover Test Multiple IMG Configuration

This figure shows a system block diagram centering on the CPU and its controlling GT. Although each side ap-

pears to have complicated connections, the controlling route of CPU 0 goes directly to GT 0, and that of CPU 1 to

GT 1. Therefore, if the system of CPU is once changed over, the ACT/STBY of GT is also changed over.

MUXMUX MUXMUXMUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX

IMG 0 IMG 1 IMG 2 IMG 3

TSW 00

TSW 10 TSW 11 TSW 12

TSW 03

TSW 13

DLKC 0

DLKC 1

TSW 01 TSW 02

TSW I/O BUS

GT 0

GT 1

LANI LANI

CPR 1

LANI LANI

CPR 0

PLO 1

PLO 0

ISAGT

CPU 1

ISAGT

CPU 0

EMA IOC/

MISC

MISC BUS

ISAGT: PZ-GT26

DLKC: PH-PC20

LANI: PZ-PC19

EMA: PX-PC00-A

GT: PH-GT09

IOC: PX-IO00

TSW: PH-SW12

PLO: PH-CK16/17

MUX: PH-PC36

Note: Because the ACT/STBY changeover of CPU also affects the GT status, the MBR key on GT card is not

used for GT system changeover. The key is used to switch over the Speech Path System, involving TSW,

DLKC, and MUX circuit cards. (See the next page.)

As shown below, though an ex-

ternal cable is physically con-

nected between ISAGT #0 and

GT #1, the actual control signal

is sent/received only between IS-

AGT 0 and GT 0 via the back-

board bus.

GT 0 GT 1

ISAGT0

CPU

IOP0

Backboard

External Cable

Backboard Bus T

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 325

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 026-7 System Block Diagram (Speech Path) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NAP-200-026

Sheet 8/8

System Changeover Test Multiple IMG Configuration

This figure shows a system block diagram centering on the GT and its controlling Speech Path System. By chang-

ing over the ACT/STBY of the Speech Path System, all the related systems, such as TSW/INT, DLKC, and MUX,

are totally switched over. The changeover can be executed by a key operation on the active GT card.

MUXMUX MUXMUXMUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX MUXMUX

IMG 0 IMG 1 IMG 2 IMG 3

TSW 00

TSW 10 TSW 11 TSW 12

TSW 03

TSW 13

DLKC 0

DLKC 1

TSW 01 TSW 02

TSW I/O BUS

LANI LANI

CPR 1

LANI LANI

CPR 0

PLO 1

PLO 0

ISAGT: PZ-GT26

DLKC: PH-PC20

LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12

PLO: PH-CK16/17

MUX: PH-PC36

Note: If the MBR key is once flipped on the active GT card, all the Speech Path related systems (TSW/INT,

DLKC, and MUX) in the same switching block are totally changed over. However, ACT/STBY of GT and

PLO is not affected.

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

Line/Trunk PMLine/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM

ISAGT

CPU 0

GT 0

GT 1

CPU 1

ISAGT

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 326

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Test Outline:

Tests are performed to see if system initialization can be executed. There are two kinds of test method; test by using

START button on the TOPU, and test by turning power ON/OFF.

Figure 027-1 System Initialization via ‘Start’ Button

NAP-200-027

Sheet 1/2

System Initialization Test

START

Perform system initialization (via START button)

Set the SYSTEM DATA key on the TOPU to NON LOAD side, and set the PROGRAM key to

NON LOAD side.

Perform system initialization by pressing START button on the TOPU.

Confirm the system When the system is initialized, CPU OPE lamp (Green) on the

DSP circuit card lights.

When the system is initialized, System Message “7-B” is

displayed on the MAT.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

To perform system initialization, set the switch keys on the TOPU as shown below, then press START button.

ALM

RST

PFT

OFF

INITIAL

START

EFFECT

PROGRAM

LOAD

SYSTEM DATA

NON LOAD ON

OFF

NON LOAD

PZ-DK222

LOAD

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 327

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-027

Sheet 2/2

System Initialization Test

Perform system initialization (by powering ON/OFF).

Initialization by powering

ON/OFF.

On all PWR Supplies, set the circuit breaker OFF

(Down). If a module contains two PWR Supplies,

they must be turned OFF.

Turn ON the PWR Supplies in each module in the

following order. If a module contains two PWR

Supplies, they must be turned ON.

Confirm When the system is initialized, the CPU OPE lamp

(Green) on the DSP turns ON.

When the system is initialized, System Message “7-

B” is displayed on the MAT.

Assignment of Date and Time After completing all the initialization tests, assign

data and time via MAT command “ATIM.”

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

IMG0:

IMG1:

IMG2:

IMG3:

LPM

TSWM

PIM0

PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

PIM0

PIM1

Note: Be sure to turn OFF the power of LPM first.

LPM PIM0 PIM1 PIM2 PIM3

Single IMG Configuration

IMG1:

IMG3:

IMG2:

IMG1:

IMG0:

LPM PIM0 PIM1 PIM2 PIM3

TSWM0

PIM0

LPM

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

PIM3

PIM2 PIM3

Single IMG Configuration

Multiple IMG Configuration

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 328

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-028

Sheet 1/1

Circuit Card Initialization Test

START

Make the No. 0 CPU the ACT system.

In each PIM, initialize any

Line/Trunk circuit card.

On the selected Line/Trunk circuit card, set MB switch UP.

The OPE lamp goes out.

System Message “7-K” is displayed.

Set MB switch DOWN.

OPE lamp turns ON.

System Message “7-L” is displayed.

Clear the alarm Clear the alarm indication by pressing ALM RST button on the

TOPU.

Make No. 1 CUP the ACT system.

In each PIM, initialize any

Line/Trunk circuit card.

On the selected Line/Trunk circuit card, set MB switch UP.

OPE lamp goes out.

System Message “7-K” is displayed.

Set MB switch DOWN.

OPE lamp turns ON.

System Message “7-L” is displayed.

Clear the alarm Clear the alarm indication by pressing ALM RST button on the

TOPU.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 329

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

4. PORT CONNECTION TEST

4.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed on all the circuits of LC and Trunk circuit cards and PWR Supplies. LC and Trunk

circuit cards are tested to confirm their operations and speech path conditions. PWR Supplies are tested to con-

firm howler tone and ringing signal.

While tests are in progress, the No. 0 CPU and TSW systems must be ACT (active).

4.2 Port Connection Test Procedure

The connection test procedure for each type of circuit card is described in the NAP indicated to the right of each

item in the following flowchart.

START

ORT (RST Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-029

ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-030

Line (LC, ELC Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-031

Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-032

Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-033

Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-034

SND (RST Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-035

3-Party Conference Trunk Function Test: NAP-200-036

Connection Test - Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service: NAP-200-037

Connection Test - Digital Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service: NAP-200-038

Connection Test - Paging Trunk for Paging Access Service: NAP-200-039

Connection Test - Paging Trunk for Paging Transfer Service: NAP-200-040

Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test: NAP-200-041

Howler and Ringing Signal Test: NAP-200-042

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 330

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-029

Sheet 1/2

ORT (RST Card) Connection Test

START

Make busy all ORTs On the front of RST card, set all MBR switches (0-7) to OFF,

making all ORTs busy.

From Station A (DP), test

ORTs one circuit at a time.

Un-busy (make idle) only ORT to be tested.

Station A goes off-hook and after hearing DT, dials the

station number of Station B.

Station A confirms ringing to Station B and Station B

answers.

Stations A and B go on-hook.

From Station B (PB), test

ORTs on circuit at a time.

Un-busy only ORT to be tested.

Station B goes off-hook and after hearing DT, dials the

station number of Station A.

Station B confirms ringing to Station A and Station A

answers.

Stations A and B go on-hook.

ORT

Station A (DP)

DT, RBT

LCStation B (PB)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 331

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-029

Sheet 2/2

ORT (RST Card) Connection Test

Perform tests for a situation where all ORTs are busy.

System Data SYS1,

INDEX 4, b0 =0

Station A goes off-hook.

Station A confirms that Reorder Tone (ROT) is heard

Station A goes off-hook.

System Data SYS1,

INDEX 4, b0 =1

Station A goes off-hook.

Station A confirms that no tone is heard.

Un-busy (make idle) a single ORT circuit.

Station A confirms that DT is heard.

Station A goes off-hook.

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 332

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-030

Sheet 1/1

ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test

START

A station repeats an ATTCON

call. Each ATTCON answers

the call.

Station A dials the operator access code (normally, “0”).

At each ATTCON, the operator confirms that ATT lamp

flashes and the ringer sounds.

At each ATTCON, the operator answers the call by pressing

ATND key.

Station A confirms speech with each ATTCON.

The operator at each ATTCON releases by pressing CANCEL

key.

Station A goes on-hook.

Each ATTCON calls a station

by pressing LOOP keys one at a

time.

At each ATTCON, the operator dials the number of Station A

by using LOOP keys (L1-L6) one at a time.

Ringing at Station A is confirmed.

Station A answers the call and confirms speech.

The operator at the ATTCON releases by pressing CANCEL

key.

Station A goes on-hook.

END

ATI

DT, RBT

LCStation A

ATI

ATTCON

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 333

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-031

Sheet 1/1

Line (LC, ELC, DLC, Card) Connection

Test

An ATTCON or Dterm is called

from each station. The called

party confirms the station

number.

On the MDF, a telephone set is connected to the line circuit

to be tested

The station (XXXX) to be tested goes off-hook and

confirms DT (Dial Tone).

The station (XXXX) calls an ATTCON or Dterm.

The called ATTCON or Dterm answers the call, and

confirms speech and the station number of the calling

station.

The call is released.

The ATTCON or Dterm calls a

station being tested.

The ATTCON or Dterm dials the station number of the

station being tested.

The called station answers and confirms speech.

The ATTCON or Dterm confirms that the dialed number and

the number of the station being tested are the same.

The call is released.

The test involving the station is

assigned as a Hot Line/House

Phone.

The station being tested goes off-hook and confirms Ring

Back Tone (RBT).

The station checks whether the call is routed to the

predetermined station/ATTCON or that a call is originated

to a predetermined trunk.

The called side answers the call and confirms speech.

The call is released.

END

Line being

tested

(XXXX)

ATTCON

D term

ATI/ELC

LC/ELC

DT, RBT

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 334

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Test Outline:

The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up an outgoing connection test for each outgoing trunk, that speech

can be made and that the call can be released.

Outgoing trunks must be tested one at a time, using the sequence of Routes and Trunk Numbers assigned at each

office.

NAP-200-032

Sheet 1/3

Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)

Connection Test

START

When a C. O. Line or Tie Line is

not connected with a trunk circuit,

temporary cross connections

between the outgoing trunk being

tested and the terminating trunk

should be set up on the MDF as a

loop-back circuit.

Referring to Figures 032-1 through 032-3, make temporary

cross connections on the MDF for a loop-back circuit.

Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a loop-

back connection from the trunk can be established.

Make busy all outgoing trunks. On the front of the Trunk circuit card, set the MB switch to

the OFF position, making the trunk busy.

Test the trunk circuits one at a

time by establishing access from a

station.

Un-busy (make idle) only the trunk to be tested.

The station dials the Access Code of the trunk being tested

and the number for the call destination.

The called side answers.

The station confirms speech.

The call is released.

Make temporary cross connections for the next trunk to be

tested.

Restore the temporary

connections, temporary Office

Data, etc. to original configuration.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 335

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

• Set up a loop-back connection between the COT (C.O. Trunk) to be tested and a station line.

Figure 032-1 COT Test Configuration

• The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.

Figure 032-2 TLT Test Configuration

• Set up a loop-back connection between the TLT (Tie Line Trunk) to be tested and another EMT.

• If the TLT is a DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Trunk, connected the related leads as shown below:

• If the TLT is a 2W E&M System, connect the related leads as shown below:

NAP-200-032

Sheet 2/3

Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)

Connection Test

LCC

LCB

LCACOT

LC TLTA

LCBTLT

TLT TLT

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 336

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

• If the TLT is a 4W E&M System, connect the related leads as shown below:

• Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown below:

Figure 032-3 DTI Test Configuration

• If the office is the primary office (Clock-Source-Office), perform the tests by disconnecting the PLO and

the M-OSC. (The mode of the PLO becomes “Self Operation Mode.”)

NAP-200-032

Sheet 3/3

Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)

Connection Test

Re-

ceive

Send

Re-

ceive

Send

TLT TLT

LC DTIA

LCBDTI

Re-

ceive

Send

Re-

ceive

Send

DTI DTI

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 337

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Test Outline:

The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up an incoming trunk connection test for each incoming trunk, that

speech can be made with ATTCON when a Ringdown Signal Interface is used, or with a station when a Dial-In Sig-

nal Interface is used. This test also confirms that the call can be released. Incoming trunks must be tested one at a

time, using the sequence of Route and Trunk Numbers assigned at each office.

NAP-200-033

Sheet 1/2

Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)

Connection Test

START

On the MDF, make temporary

cross connections between the

incoming trunk to be tested and an

outgoing trunk as a loop-back

circuit.

Referring to Figures 032-1 through 032-3 in NAP-200-032,

make temporary cross connections on the MDF for a loop-

back circuit.

Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a loop-

back connection from the trunk can be established.

Make busy all outgoing trunks other than the cross-connected trunk.

Test incoming trunk circuits one at a time.

For Ringdown Signal

Interface.

Station A dials the station number of Station C.

The call terminates to an Attendant Console.

The Attendant Console answers the call and confirms

speech.

The call is released.

Make temporary connections for the next trunk to be tested.

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 338

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-033

Sheet 2/2

Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)

Connection Test

For a Dial-In Signal

Interface.

Station A dials the access code for the outgoing trunk and

the number of Station B.

Station B answers the call and confirms speech.

The call is released.

Make temporary cross connections for the next trunk to be

tested.

Restore the temporary cross connections, temporary Office Data, etc. to original configuration.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 339

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-034

Sheet 1/1

Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card)

Connection Test

START

On the MDF, make temporary cross connections between the Trunk for Direct-In Termination (DIT) and

an LC.

C.O.Line Incoming Call Station B dials the number of LC “C” (Station C).

Incoming Call to Station via

DIT Trunk.

The call terminates to Station A; Station A rings.

Confirm that the ringing is distinct from that of an intra-

office call or ordinary C.O. call.

• The ringing signal for Direct-In Termination calls can be

the same as that used for C.O. calls if the related Office

Data is assigned.

System Data SYS1, INDEX 72, SYS3, INDEX 0, and

parameter DR of Command “ARTD”.

Answer and Talk Station A goes off-hook.

Stations A and B talk with each other.

Release Station A and B both go on-hook.

Remove the temporary cross connections.

END

Station B

Station C

Station A

DIT

COT

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 340

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-035

Sheet 1/1

SND (RST Card) Connection Test

START

When a C.O. Line or Tie Line is

not connected with the trunk,

make an arrangement for trunk

loop-back as illustrated above.

On the MDF, make temporary cross connections for a

loop back circuit.

Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a

connection can be set up with Station B via a SND.

Make busy all SNDs On the front of the RST circuit card, set all MBS switches

(0-7) to the OFF position, thereby making all SNDs busy.

Test SNDs one after another Un-busy (make idle) only the SND to be tested.

Station A dials the access code of the trunk and the

station number of Station B.

Station B answers and talks

The call is released.

Restore the temporary cross connections, temporary Office Data etc. to original configuration.

END

Station B

Station A

COT

SND

ORT

MAT

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 341

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-036

Sheet 1/1

3-party Conference Trunk Function Test

START

Made busy all CFTs Made busy all CFTs using MAT command “MBTK”.

Test CFTs one at a time Un-busy (make idle) only CFT to be tested.

Stations A and B are engaged in a station to station connection.

Station A makes a Switch Hook Flash (SHF) and after hearing

DT, dials the station number of Station C.

Station C answers the call.

Station A, after having talked with Station C, makes a SHF and

confirms that a three-way connection has been set up.

The call is released.

Cancel the Make Busy of

the CFT

Un-busy (make idle) CFT using the “MBTK” command.

END

Station B

Station C

Station A

SPDT,RBT

TSW/INT

CARD

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 342

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-037

Sheet 1/1

Connection Test-Announcement Trunk

for Announcement Service

START

Dial the announcement service

code

Station A dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the

announcement

Station A is connected to the announcement machine and

hears the announcement.

Dial the announcement service

code

Station B dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the

announcement

Station B is connected to the announcement machine and

hears the announcement.

Release Confirm that the announcement machine stops when both

Stations A and B goes on-hook.

END

Station A

Station B

ANNOUNCEMENT

TRK

ANNOUNCEMENT

MACHINE

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 343

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-038

Sheet 1/1

Connection Test-Digital Announcement

Trunk for Announcement Service

START

Dial the announcement service code Station A dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the

announcement

Station A is connected to the announcement trunk and

hears the announcement.

Dial the announcement service code Station B dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the

announcement

Station B is connected to the announcement trunk and

hears the announcement.

Release Confirm that the announcement stops when both

Stations A and B goes on-hook.

END

Station A

StationB

ANNOUNCEMENT

TRK

DAT

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 344

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-039

Sheet 1/1

Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging

Access Service

START

Dial the paging access code Station A/ATTCON dials the paging access code and hears

CRBT (Continuous Ringback Tone).

In about 1 second, CRBT stops.

Speaker Paging Check whether speaker paging is possible after CRBT has

stopped.

Release Station A goes on-hook or the ATTCON depresses

CANCEL key.

END

LCStation A

ATTCON

PGT

AMP SP

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 345

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

• Paging Transfer Service can be selected according to System Data (SYS1, INDEX 73).

1. Non-Delay System

2. Delay and Non-Delay System

3. Paging Transfer Supervision

NAP-200-040

Sheet 1/2

Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging

Transfer Service

START

Call the Paging Trunk Stations A and B are engaged in a station to station

connection.

Station A makes a Switch Hook Flash (SHF) and hears

SPDT. Station B is held on the line.

Station A dials the paging access code and hears CRBT. In

about 1 sec., CRBT is no longer heard and Station A is able

to page through the loudspeaker.

The paging party For a Non-Delay System:

Station A remains on hold.

For a Delay System with Paging Transfer Supervision:

Station A hangs up.

The paged party answers Station C (the paged party) dials the paging access code

(answer).

PGT

AMP SP

Paged Station

Hold Station

Paging Station

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 346

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-040

Sheet 2/2

Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging

Transfer Service

Connection

For Non-Delay-System

Station C is connected to Station A.

When Station A hangs up, Stations B and C are automatically connected with

each other.

For a Delay-System

Station A rings and picks up handset

Station A is connected to Stations C.

When Station A hangs up, Stations B and C are automatically connected with

each other.

For Paging Transfer Supervision

Station C is connected to Station B.

Release

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 347

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-041

Sheet 1/1

Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card)

Connection Test

START

Call the Radio Paging Equipment Station A dials the radio paging access code and hears

Special Dial Tone from the Radio Paging Equipment, then

dials the slave station number.

The paging radio of the slave station starts ringing.

By hearing CRBT (Continuous Ring Back Tone) from the

Radio Paging Equipment, Station A confirms that the slave

station is being paged, then goes on-hook.

The paged party answers The slave station (the radio-pages party) dials the paging an-

swer code at the nearby Station B, hears SPDT through the

Radio Paging Equipment, then dials the paging answer code.

Station A rings and picks up the handset.

Confirm that Stations A and B can talk with each other.

Release Stations A and B both go on-hook.

END

COT

Station A

Station B

RBT

COT

RADIO PAGING

SLAVE STATION

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 348

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Test Outline:

The Howler Tone Generator and the Ringing Generator are equipped on the PWR Supply.

The purpose of the test is to confirm ringing signal by setting up a station to station connection and a howler tone

connection from a station accommodated in any PIM.

NAP-200-042

Sheet 1/2

Howler & Ringing Signal Test

START

Check PWR0 in each PIM.

While both PWR Supplies are OFF, turn ON power to PWR0. Leave PWR1 OFF.

Check howler tone.

A station accommodated in the PIM whose PWR Supply is to be tested goes off-hook.

(analog port only)

The station hears DT.

The station hears ROT within 12 seconds.

The station should confirm hearing howler tone within 30 seconds.

Check ringing signal.

Set up a station-to-station connection between two stations in the IM inm whose PWR

Supply is to be tested. (analog port only)

Confirm that ringing signal is sent out.

Station B

RBT

Station C

Howler Signal

Station A

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 349

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-042

Sheet 2/2

Howler & Ringing Signal Test

Check PWR1 in each PIM.

While both PWR Supplies are OFF, turn ON power to PWR1. Leave PWR0 OFF.

Check howler tone.

A station accommodated in the PIM for which the PWR Supply is to be tested goes off-

hook. (analog port only)

The station hears DT.

The station hears ROT within 12 seconds.

The station should confirm hearing howler tone within 30 seconds.

Check ringing signal.

Set up a station-to-station connection between two stations accommodated in the IM

inm whose PWR Supply is to be tested. (analog port only)

Confirm that ringing signal is sent out.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 350

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

5. OVERALL TEST

5.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed to check C.O. Lines and/or Tie Lines by connecting them to a trunk on an individual

basis.

The speech path conditions (speech level, presence of noise, one-way speech, no speech, etc.) over the connec-

tion to the distant office will be checked. Release of the trunk used will also be checked.

5.2 Overall Test Procedure

The procedure for the Overall Test is described in the NAPs indicated to the right of each item in the following

flowchart.

START

Overall Test of C.O. Line Outgoing Call: NAP-200-043

Overall Test of C.O. Line Incoming Call: NAP-200-044

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call: NAP-200-045

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call: NAP-200-046

Test of Connection Alternate Routing to All Tie Lines: NAP-200-047

Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line: NAP-200-048

PAD Setting: NAP-200-049

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 351

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-043

Sheet 1/1

Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call

START

Seizure of trunk to be tested

When seizing from a

station

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make all other

trunks busy.

Station A dials the trunk access number.

Station A, after hearing dial tone from the C.O., dials the

pilot number for the local office and allows the call to be

terminated to that office via loop-back at the C.O.

When seizing from an

ATTCON

An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk

designated via Individual Trunk Access service.

The ATTCON, after hearing dial tone from the C.O., dials

the pilot number for the local office and allows the call to be

terminated to that office via loop-back at the C.O.

Call termination to ATTCON The call looped back at the C.O. terminates to the

ATTCON.

Check of speech conditions After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the

speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise,

and one-way speech state.

Release

When all COTs have been

checked and a fault is detected.

Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O., and determine

whether the trunk side or the C.O. Line side is faulty.

If the C.O. Line is faulty, make a request to the C.O. for

repair.

END

ATTCON

PBX

Station A

ATI

COT

Central

Office

Exchange

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 352

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Test Outline:

The tests comprising this NAP are to be performed according to the C.O. Line Number Table provided by the C.O.

If the C.O. Line Numbers are not known, tests cannot be performed because loop-back cannot be performed at the

C.O.

In addition, tests cannot be performed which involve Direct Inward Dialing. Under such circumstances, ask the C.O.

to perform an incoming test.

NAP-200-044

Sheet 1/1

Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call

START

Seizure of trunk to be tested From the ATTCON, set up a connection with a specific trunk

designated via Individual Trunk Access.

After hearing dial tone from the C.O., dial the C.O. Line

number of the trunk being tested from the ATTCON.

Call termination to ATTCON The call looped back at the C.O. terminates to the

ATTCON.

Speech Condition Check After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the

speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise,

and one-way speech.

Release

When all COT trunks have been

checked and a fault is detected.

Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O. and identify

whether the trunk side or the C.O. Line side is faulty.

If the C.O. Line side is faulty, make a request to the C.O. for

repair.

END

ATTCON

PBX

ATI

COT

Central

Office

Exchange

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 353

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-045

Sheet 1/2

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing

Call

START

Seizure of trunk to be tested

When seizing from a

station

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make busy all

other trunks.

Station A dials the number for Station B in the PBX-B

When seizing from an

ATTCON

An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk

designated by Individual Trunk Access for CCIS TRK

service and dials the number for Station B in the PBX-B.

Call termination to Station B in

the PBX-B

The call terminates to Station B via a CCIS Tie Line.

Check of speech conditions After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the

speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise

and one-way speech state.

Release

When all CCIS Tie Line Trunks

have been checked and a fault

has been detected

Perform fault localization procedure when a fault has

occurred to CCIS Tie Line (See Procedure A).

If the distant office is faulty, make a request to the distant

office for repair.

END

ATTCON

PBX-A

ATI

LC LC

Station A PBX-B Station B

(PBX to be tested)

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 354

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

(Procedure A)

NAP-200-045

Sheet 2/2

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing

Call

START

On the DTI/CCT card, set its MB switch UP.

In any office other than the Primary Office (Clock-Source-Office), disconnect the DTI/CCT cable

connector at the DTI/CCT side (Backplane of PIM)

PLO alarm is generated, but ignore it.

The PLO starts running by itself.

Make the following connection at the MDF using a paired wire.

The DTI does not recover. (CCH/

CCT Link Failure may occur, but

ignore it.)

System message “3-J” is not displayed.

The DTI/CCT is faulty.

The DTI recovered. (CCH/CCT

Link Failure may occur, but ignore

it.)

System message “3-J” is displayed.

The DTI/CCT is normal.

Call the distant office and ask for repair.

END

DTI/CCT

LEADS CROSS

CONNECTION

MDF

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 355

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-046

Sheet 1/1

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming

Call

START

Seizure of trunk to be tested Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make busy all

other trunks.

Termination of incoming call to

Station A in the self office

An incoming call from the distant office terminates to

Station A.

Check of speech After the call has been answered at Station A, check the

speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise

and one-way speech state.

Release

When all CCIS Tie Line Trunks

have been checked and a fault has

been detected

Perform fault localization procedure when a fault has

occurred to CCIS Tie Line. (See Procedure A of NAP-200-

045.)

If the distant office is faulty, make a request to the distant

office for repair.

END

PBX-A

LC LC

Station A PBX-B Station B

(PBX to be tested)

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 356

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-047

Sheet 1/2

Test of Connection and Alternate Routing

to All Tie Lines

START

Test the trunks in the primary

route one at a time.

Make busy all trunks in the primary route except the trunk to

be tested.

Station A calls Station B via the primary route.

After Station B answers, check the normality of the speech

condition including the speech level, presence of noise, and

one-way speech.

Release.

Make all the trunks in the primary route busy.

Test the trunks in the alternate

route one at a time.

Make busy all trunks in the alternate route except the trunk

to be tested.

Station A calls Station B via the alternate route.

After Station B answers, check the normality of the speech

condition including the speech level, presence of noise, and

one-way speech.

Release.

Cancel the Make Busy condition of the trunks.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 357

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 047-1 Combination of Tie Line Network and Public Network

Figure 047-2 Tie Line Network

NAP-200-047

Sheet 2/2

Test of Connection and Alternate Routing

to All Tie Lines

Basic Route

Station A Station B

PBX to

be tested

Tie Line

Network

Public

Network

PBX

TRKs

Alternate

Route

PBX

Station A Station B

TRKs

ALTERNATE

ROUTE

BASIC ROUTE

PBX to be

tested

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 358

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Figure 048-1 Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

NAP-200-048

Sheet 1/2

Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

START

Test of direct dial-in tandem

connection

Test of Primary Route

Station A calls Station B.

Confirm speech between Stations A and B.

Release.

Test of Alternate Route

Make busy all the trunks in the primary route.

Station A calls Station B.

Confirm speech between Stations A and B.

Release.

Un-busy (make idle) all the trunks.

Primary Route

Station A

Station B

PBX to

be tested

PBX

TRKs

Alternate

Route

PBX

PBX TRKs

IRT

TRKs

ATTCON

(1)

(3)

(2)

Station C

(1):

(2):

(3):

Direct tandem connection by dial-in

Tandem connection via ATTCON

Tandem connection via Station

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 359

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-048

Sheet 2/2

Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

Test of tandem connection via

ATTCON

Station A dials the access code for the ATTCON.

The ATTCON answers and sets up a tandem connection to

Station B.

The ATTCON releases, and speech between Stations A and

B is confirmed.

Release.

Test of tandem connection via

station

Station A calls Station C.

Station C, after answering, makes a Switch Hook Flash

(SHF) and calls Station B.

After Station B answers, Station C release. Speech between

Stations A and B is confirmed.

Release.

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 360

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

For the PBX, PADs can be set according to the connecting status of the Tie Line involved.

(a) For an outgoing/incoming call via a Tie Line:

• Via MAT command “ARTD” and switch settings on the TLT circuit card.

(b) For a tandem Tie Line connection:

• Via command “APAD” or switch settings on the TLT circuit card(s).

At both the originating and terminating offices, an 8 dB PAD is set for the EMT route via “ARTD” command or

switch settings. At the tandem office, a 4 dB PAD is set for the terminating and originating sides of each EMT route

via command “APAD”.

Through this arrangement, an 8 dB PAD is in service for outgoing and incoming connections, and 4 dB PADs are in

service for each line in a tandem connection (total: 8 dB). This arrangement is shown in Figure 049-1.

Figure 049-1 Example of PAD Setting

NAP-200-049

Sheet 1/2

PAD Setting

Originating Office

0 dB

8 dB

EMT

Carrier

Terminal

–8

Carrier

Terminal

–8

EMT

PAD

Terminating Office

0 dB

8 dB

EMT Carrier

Terminal

–8

Carrier

Terminal

–8

EMT

PAD

4 dB

Tandem Office

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 361

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

When setting up a No. 7 CCIS Network, PAD setting differs from that in the analog network.

• Via “ARTD” command.

(d) For a tandem Tie Line connection:

• Via “APAD” command.

At both the originating and terminating offices, 0 dB is set to the outgoing side and 8 dB is set to the terminating of

the DTI/CCT route via “ARTD” command.

At the tandem office, 0 dB is set for both the terminating and originating sides of each DTI/CCT route via “APAD”

command.

This arrangement is shown in Figure 049-2.

Figure 049-2 Example of PAD Setting for CCIS

NAP-200-049

Sheet 2/2

PAD Setting

Terminating Office

0 dB

–8 dB

–8 dB 0 dB

0 dB 0 dB

DTI/CCT

Originating Office

0 dB

–8 dB

–8 dB 0 dB

0 dB 0 dB

DTI/CCTDTI/CCT

Tandem Office

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 362

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

6. IP CONNECTION TEST

6.1 Outline

Connection tests are to be performed to check IP connection by connecting terminals to the trunks and verify

the normality of the system. FCCS stands for Fusion Call Control Signaling.

6.2 IP Connection Test Procedure

The procedures for the IP connection test are described in the NAPs at the right of each item in the following

flowchart.

START

IP PAD Connection Test:

(IP PAD Card)

NAP-200-050

IPTRK Connection Test:

(IP Trunk Card for FCCS)

NAP-200-051

IPTRK Connection Test:

(IP Trunk Card for CCIS)

NAP-200-052

IPTRK Connection Test:

(IP Trunk Card for H.323)

NAP-200-053

PHA Connection Test:

(PHA Card)

NAP-200-054

PHD Connection Test:

(PHD Card)

NAP-200-055

PHC Connection Test:

(PHC Card)

NAP-200-056

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 363

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

The following describes the procedure for confirming the normality of IP PAD. Here describes procedure for per-

forming connection test between IP Enabled Dterm and the existing terminal (Dterm and analog terminal) or the ex-

isting trunk (COT, TLT, and so on). Perform the test with the other combinations of terminals, when needed.

Note 1: It is essential that IPX and the controlled LC/TRK are in normal condition.

Note 2: Perform the test after confirming that PHD/PHA is working normally by using tests.

Figure 050-1 Diagram of IP PAD Connection Test

NAP-200-050

Sheet 1/3

IP PAD Connection Test

IP PAD LC/ELC

TRK

MGC

(DRS)

IPX

32ch

IP Enabled Dterm

Existing Terminal

PSTN

VC0

VC3

OPE

LINK

IP PAD (PA-32IPLB)

PZ-16VCTB

(Sub PKG0)

PZ-16VCTB

(Sub PKG1)

(*A)

(*C)

(*B)

Network Equipment

(SW HUB, Router, etc) IP Packet

PCM

RJ45 Connector

TRK

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 364

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-050

Sheet 2/3

IP PAD Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using AFPC, ACTK, and ALIDL.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

START

[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on IP PAD is lighting. (*A)

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card.

2) Initialize the circuit card.

3) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

4) Replace the circuit card.

[2] Confirm that VC0-3 lamps (*B) on IP PAD are lighting when using voice compression sub card. (*B)

The lamps on the circuit card turn on in the following condition:

-When a sub card (Sub PKG0) is installed : VC0 and VC1 turn on.

-When two sub cards (Sub PKG0/1) are installed : VC0, VC1, VC2 and VC3 turn on.

Make sure LAN cables (straight) are connected correctly.

Check LAN cable by a tester or other equipment.

Check the normality of network equipment (SW HUB, Router, etc.).

[3] Confirm that LINK lamp (*C) on IP PAD is lighting, which indicates that the circuit card is connected to

the network physically.

YES

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 365

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-050

Sheet 3/3

IP PAD Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Check that the speech path channel is unblocked, using MBTK.

Route restriction is cancelled by using ATNR and ARSC.

Make sure the settings of IP Enabled Dterm by using ALIDL, AFPC, ACTL, and AISTL or the hardware

settings.

[4] Call the existing terminal (Dterm, analog terminal, and trunk) by using IP Enabled Dterm.

IP PAD translates voice from IP packets to PCM signaling then sends it to LC/ELC/TRK

accommodating the existing terminals.

Check the office data.

[5] Is the speech available ?

[6] Perform the above procedures between IP Enabled Dterm and the existing terminal (or the existing trunk)

when needed.

YES

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 366

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

The following describes the procedure for confirming the normality of IPTRK in the case of FCCS over IP. Here

describes procedure for performing connection test over FCCS between existing terminals.

Note: It is essential that IPX and the controlled LC/TRK are in normal condition.

Figure 051-1 Diagram of IPTRK (FCCS) Connection Test

NAP-200-051

Sheet 1/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for FCCS)

Connection Test

MGC

IPX

OPE

IP-LINK

VC0

VC1

F-LINK

IPTRK (PA-16IPTC)

(*A)

(*C)

(*D)

(*B)

RJ45 Connector Voice Signaling

FCCS Signaling

Voice Signaling

FCCS Signaling

HUB

LANI

LC/ELC

IPTRK

External LAN

Internal LAN

F-LAN

IP-LAN

MGC

IPX

HUB

LANI

IPTRK

External LAN

Internal LAN

F-LAN

IP-LAN

Existing Terminal

IP Network

Voice Signaling

FCCS Signaling

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 367

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-051

Sheet 2/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for FCCS)

Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card, and make sure that the sub card is stable when used.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using ACRD/ACTK command.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

START

[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on IPTRK is lighting.

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card, and make sure that the sub card is stable when used.

2) Initialize the circuit card.

3) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

4) Replace the circuit card.

[2] Confirm that VC0 lamp (*B) on IPTRK is lighting, which indicates that voice compression is active.

When sub card is installed, confirm VC1 lamp (*B) on the circuit card is lighting.

When IP-LINK is off : Make sure IP-LAN connectors and external LAN cables are installed.

When F-LINK is off : Make sure F-LAN connectors and internal LAN cables are installed.

- Check LAN cables (straight) are stable in the connector.

- Check LAN cables by a tester or other equipment.

- Check the normality of network equipment (SW HUB and router) and HUB circuit card.

[3] Confirm that IP-LINK/F-LINK lamps (*C) on IPTRK are lighting green, which indicate that the circuit

card is connected to the network (or FCCS Network) physically.

YES

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 368

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-051

Sheet 3/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for FCCS)

Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Adjust parameters by using AVIPS. After the settings, initialize the circuit card.

Make sure the office data by using commands.

(AFCH, AGIP, AETH, ACAN, AFRT, AVIPS and so on.)

[4] Confirm that L0 lamp (*D) on IPTRK is lighting green, which indicates FCCS is available.

Make sure that the trunk to be tested is unblocked, using MBTK.

Check the office data by using commands (AFCH, AETH, ACAN, ACTK AFRT, AGIP, AVIPS, etc.).

Use ping command to check the normality of connection between router (or other equipment) and PBX.

- When the connection is available, check the data by AFCH, AGIP, AFRT, and AETH.

- When the connection is not available, check the data by AETH, and AGIP.

[5] Block all the trunks except for the trunk to be tested, and then self node make a call with an Station

number, which other node accommodates; voice signaling and control signaling are sent/received via

IPTRK between the nodes. Is the test successfully completed ? Is the trunk successfully seized ?

[6] Is the speech available ?

YES

[7] Perform the previous page for all the trunks by using MBTK or MBTC.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 369

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

The following describes the procedure for confirming the normality of IPTRK in the case of CCIS over IP. Here

describes procedure for performing connection test over CCIS between existing terminals.

Note: It is essential that IPX and the controlled LC/TRK are in normal condition.

Figure 052-1 Diagram of IPTRK (CCIS) Connection Test

NAP-200-052

Sheet 1/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for CCIS)

Connection Test

MGC

IPX

OPE

IP-LINK

VC0

VC1

IPTRK (PA-16IPTC)

(*A)

(*C)

(*D)

(*B)

RJ45 Connector

Voice Signaling

CCIS Signaling

IP Network

LANI

LC/ELC

IPTRK

External LAN

IP-LAN

MGC

IPX

Voice Signaling

CCIS Signaling

LANI

IPTRK

External LAN

IP-LAN

Existing Terminal Existing Terminal

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 370

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-052

Sheet 2/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for CCIS)

Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card, and make sure that the sub card is stable when used.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using ACRD/ACTK command.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

START

[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on IPTRK is lighting.

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card, and make sure that the sub card is stable when used.

2) Initialize the circuit card.

3) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

4) Replace the circuit card.

[2] Confirm that VC0 lamp (*B) on IPTRK is lighting, which indicates that voice compression is active.

When sub card is installed, confirm VC1 lamp (*B) on the circuit card is lighting.

When IP-LINK is off : Make sure F-LAN connectors and external LAN cables are installed.

- Check LAN cables (straight) are stable in the connector.

- Check LAN cables by a tester or other equipment.

- Check the normality of network equipment (SW HUB and Router) and HUB circuit card.

[3] Confirm that IP-LINK lamp (*C) on IPTRK is lighting green, which indicates that the circuit card is

connected to the network physically.

YES

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 371

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-052

Sheet 3/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for CCIS)

Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Adjust parameters by using AVIPS. After the settings, initialize the circuit card.

Make sure the office data by using commands.

(AGIP, AVIPS, ARTD, ADPC, ACSC, ACIC1, ACIC2, ARTI, APIPL, APIPN, AFRSL, and AFRSN)

[4] Confirm that L0 lamp (*D) on IPTRK is lighting green, which indicates CCIS is available.

Make sure that the trunk to be tested is unblocked, using MBTK.

Use ping command to check the normality of connection between router (or other equipment) and PBX.

Check the office data by using commands.

(AGIP, AVIPS, ARTD, ADPC, ACSC, ACIC1, ACIC2, ARTI, APIPL, APIPN, AFRSL, and AFRSN)

- When the connection is available, check the data by using AFRSL, AGIP, and APIPL.

- When the connection is not available, check the data by using ACSC, ADPC, AGIPS, ARTD, and ARTI.

[5] Block all the trunks except for the trunk to be tested, and then self node make a test call with an station

number, which other node accommodates; voice signaling and control signaling are sent/received via

IPTRK between the nodes. Is the test successfully completed? Is the trunk successfully seized?

[6] Is the speech available ?

YES

[7] Perform the previous page for all the trunks by using MBTK or MBTC.

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 372

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

The following describes the procedure for confirming the normality of IPTRK in the case of H.323 over IP. Here

describes procedure for performing connection test with H.323 between existing terminals.

Note: It is essential that IPX and the controlled LC/TRK are in normal condition.

Figure 053-1 Diagram of IPTRK (H.323) Connection Test

NAP-200-053

Sheet 1/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for H.323)

Connection Test

MGC

IPX

OPE

IP-LINK

VC0

VC1

IPTRK (PA-16IPTC)

(*A)

(*C)

(*D)

(*B)

RJ45 Connector

Voice Signaling

H.323 Signaling

IP Network

LANI

LC/ELC

IPTRK

External LAN

IP-LAN

MGC

IPX

Voice Signaling

H.323 Signaling

LANI

IPTRK

External LAN

IP-LAN

Existing Terminal

L1 (*E)

Existing Terminal

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 373

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-053

Sheet 2/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for H.323)

Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card, and make sure that the sub card is stable.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using ACRD/ACTK command when used.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

START

[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on IPTRK is lighting.

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card, and make sure that the sub card is stable when used.

2) Initialize the circuit card.

3) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

4) Replace the circuit card.

[2] Confirm that VC0 lamp (*B) on IPTRK is lighting, which indicates that voice compression is active.

When sub card is installed, confirm VC1 lamp (*B) on the circuit card is lighting.

When IP-LINK is off : Make sure IP-LAN connectors and external LAN cables are installed.

- Check LAN cables (straight) are stable in the connector.

- Check LAN cables by a tester or other equipment.

- Check the normality of network equipment (SW HUB and Router) and HUB circuit card.

[3] Confirm that IP-LINK lamp (*C) on IPTRK is lighting green, which indicates that the circuit card is

connected to the network physically.

YES

Check the system message.

Make sure the office data by using commands.

(AGIP, AVIPS, ARTD, ADPC, ARTI, ATRK, ACSC, ACIC1, and ACIC2)

[4] Confirm that L0(*D)/L1(*E) lamps on IPTRK are lighting green, which indicate H.323 is available.

YES

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 374

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-053

Sheet 3/3

IPTRK (IP Trunk Card for H.323)

Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Make sure that the trunk to be tested is unblocked, using MBTK.

Use PING command to check the normality of connection between router (or other equipment) and 

Gate Keeper.

Check the office data by using commands.

(AGIP, AVIPS, ARTD, ADPC, ACSC, ACIC1, ACIC2, ARTI, APIPL, APIPN, AFRSL, and AFRSN)

- When the connection is available, check the data by using AGIP, AVIPS, and data setting of Gate Keeper.

- When the connection is not available, check the data by using AGIP.

When L1 lamp remains flashing, check the following:

Make sure the office data by using commands.

(AGIP, AVIPS, ARTD, ADPC, ARTI, ATRK, ACSC, ACIC1, and ACIC2)

Make sure the system message indicates the data is successfully registered in GK.

Check the settings for GK.

[5]

Confirm that L1 lamp on IPTRK is changed into lighting, which indicates the data is successfully

registered in Gate Keeper (GK)

[6] Block all the trunks except for the trunk to be tested, and then self node makes a test call with an station

number, which other node accommodates. Is the test successfully completed? Is the trunk successfully

seized?

YES

Adjust parameters by using AVIPS.

[7] Is the speech available ?

YES

[8] Perform the previous page for all the trunks by using MBTK or MBTC.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 375

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

The following describes the procedure for confirming the normality of PHA. Here describes procedure for perform-

ing connection test between analog terminals attached to MC. Perform the test with the other combinations of ter-

minals, when needed.

Note: It is essential that IPX and the controlled LC/TRK are in normal condition.

Figure 054-1 Diagram of PHA Connection Test

NAP-200-054

Sheet 1/2

PHA Connection Test

SW02 (MODE)

LOAD

NALM

PHA

MGC

(DRS)

IPX

MC-2A

PWR

LINE

LINK 100M

-OPERATION-

Tx/Rv

Analog Terminal

MC-2A

PWR

LINE

LINK 100M

-OPERATION-

Tx/Rv

Analog Terminal

Note

OPE

LINK

PHA (PA-CC118)

(*A)

(*B)

Network Equipment

(SW HUB, Router, etc)

RJ45 Connector

peer-to-peer

Signaling

Voice

Note: “Peer to Peer” is a direct calling connection between IP terminals/IP stations with each other

without the use of a PBX line card.

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 376

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-054

Sheet 2/2

PHA Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card, and make sure that the sub card is stable when used.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using ALIDL.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

START

[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on PHA is lighting.(*A)

When the lamp is flashing, check the following:

Check LAN cables (straight) are stable in the connector.

Check LAN cables by using a tester or other equipment.

Check the normality of network equipment (SW HUB and Router).

In the case of using MC, make sure that ON LINE lamp on MC is lighting.

[2] Confirm that LINK lamp (*B) on PHA is lighting green, which indicates that the circuit card is connected

to the network physically.

Connection restriction is cancelled by using ATNR and other commands.

Make sure that the settings of the analog terminal are correct by using AISTL and other commands.

Check the LEDs (PWR, ONLINE and LINK) on the front panel of MC are lighting.

[3] Call an analog terminal attached to MC by using an analog terminal attached to MC.

(At this time, analog signaling is received/sent between MC and MGC via PHA.) Is the test successfully

completed?

YES

[4] Perform the above procedures between an analog terminal (or IP Enabled Dterm) and an analog

terminal via MC if necessary.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 377

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

The following describes the procedure for confirming the normality of PHD. Here describes procedure for perform-

ing connection test between IP Enabled Dterms. Perform the test with the other combinations of terminals, when

needed.

Note: It is essential that IPX and the controlled LC/TRK are in normal condition.

Figure 055-1 Diagram of PHD Connection Test

NAP-200-055

Sheet 1/3

PHD Connection Test

SW02 (MODE)

LOAD

NALM

PHD

MGC

(DRS)

IPX

IP Enabled Dterm

OPE

LINK

PHD (PA-CC118)

(*A)

(*B)

Network Equipment

(SW HUB, Router, etc)

RJ45 Connector

peer-to-peer

Signaling

Note

Signaling

Voice

IP Enabled Dterm

Note: “Peer to Peer” is a direct calling connection between IP terminals/IP stations with each other

without the use of a PBX line card.

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 378

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-055

Sheet 2/3

PHD Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using ALIDL.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

START

[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on PHD is lighting. OPE and BLN lamps need about one minute to turn on

after the initialization.

Check LAN cables (straight) are stable in the connector.

Check LAN cables by using a tester or other equipment.

Check the normality of network equipment (SW HUB and Router).

[2] Confirm that LINK lamp (*B) on PHD is lighting green, which indicates that the circuit card is connected

to the network physically.

Connection restriction is cancelled, using ATNR and other commands.

Make sure that the setting of IP Enabled Dterm is correctly registered, using AISTL, AMAC, and its

hardware setting.

[3] Call IP Enabled Dterm by using IP Enabled Dterm.

(At this time, controlling signaling is received/sent between MGCs (or terminals) via PHD.)

YES

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 379

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-055

Sheet 3/3

PHD Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Make sure the data by using AISDL.

[4] Is the speech available ?

[5] Perform the above procedures between IP Enabled Dterm and IP Enabled Dterm (or an analog terminal

attached to MC) if necessary.

YES

END

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 380

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

The following describes the procedure for confirming the normality of PHC. Here describes procedure for perform-

ing connection test between IP Enabled Dterms. Perform the test with the other combinations of terminals, when

needed.

Note: It is essential that IPX and the controlled LC/TRK are in normal condition.

Figure 056-1 Diagram of PHC Connection Test

NAP-200-056

Sheet 1/3

PHC Connection Test

PHD

PHDPHC PHC

MGC

(DRS)

MGC

(DRS)

IPX

IP Enabled Dterm IP Enabled Dterm

OPE

LINK

PHC (PA-CC117)

(*A)

(*B)

Network Equipment

(SW HUB, Routers,etc)

RJ45 Connector

peer-to-peer Note

Signaling

Signaling CCIS CCIS

Voice

IP Network

Voice is directly sent/received between the terminals, not using MGC.

Note: “Peer to Peer” is a direct calling connection between IP terminals/IP stations with each other with-

out the use of a PBX line card.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 5

Page 381

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-056

Sheet 2/3

PHC Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using ARTD/ARTI/ATRK/DLEN.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

START

[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on PHC is lighting.

Check LAN cables (straight) are stable in the connector.

Check LAN cables by using a tester or other equipment.

Check the normality of network equipment (HUB, SW HUB, and Router).

[2] Confirm that LINK lamp (*B) on PHC is lighting, which indicates that the circuit card is connected to

the network physically.

Check that the trunk is unblocked, using MBTK.

Check that the virtual trunk is initialized, using SCVT.

Route restriction is cancelled, using ARSC and other commands.

Make sure that the numbering plan data is correctly registered, using commands (ANDPL, ASPAL,

AFRSL, AOPRL, APIPL, AMND, ARNPL).

Make sure that CCIS related data is correctly registered, using commands (ADPC, ACSC, ACIC1,

ACIC2).

Make sure that PHC related data is correctly registered, using AGIP.

[3] Call the other IP Enabled Dterm by using IP Enabled Dterm.

(At this time, controlling signaling is received/sent between MGCs via PHC.)

Is the test successfully completed ?

YES

CHAPTER 5 ND-71548 (E)

Page 382

Issue 2

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-056

Sheet 3/3

PHC Connection Test

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to

the next step.

1) Remove and insert the circuit card.

2) Make sure office data and mount location data by using ARTD/ARTI/ATRK/DLEN.

3) Initialize the circuit card.

4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.

5) Replace the circuit card.

[4] Is the speech available ?

[5] Perform the above procedures between an analog terminal (or IP Enabled Dterm) and an analog terminal

via MC if necessary.

YES

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 6

Page 383

Issue 2

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

CHAPTER 6 FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

1. GENERAL

The fault recovery procedures in this Chapter are used when a connection cannot be established in the normal

manner or an abnormal connection is discovered as a result of the tests in Chapter 4, “SYSTEM STARTUP”,

and Section 2., “BASIC CONNECTION TEST” of Chapter 5.

2. OUTLINE OF PROCEDURE FOR FAULT RECOVERY

The procedures for performing fault recovery are described in the NAPs indicated to the right of each item in

the following flowchart.

START

Abnormal Lamp Indication After System Startup: NAP-200-057

Faulty DT (Dial Tone) Connection: NAP-200-058

Faulty Station To Station Connection: NAP-200-059

END

CHAPTER 6 ND-71548 (E)

Page 384

Issue 2

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-057

Sheet 1/2

Abnormal Lamp Indications After System

Startup

START

Perform the following when the OPE lamp (Green) does not turn ON on any circuit cards in a PIM

Using MAT command “AUNT”, check whether UNIT data has been assigned.

Replace the TSW/MUX card in the PIM with a spare.

Check whether the flat cable connected to the “BUSXX” terminal on the PIM backplane is

securely connected.

A PIM will occasionally malfunction due to a single circuit card in the PIM. Therefore, check

the circuit cards via the following steps:

Extract all circuit cards from the PIM other than the TSW/MUX and the PWR Supplies.

Insert one circuit card into its mounting slot and see if its OPE lamp turns ON. Repeat

this procedure for the remaining circuit cards.

Perform the following when the OPE lamp (Green) does not turn ON on a Line Circuit card

Confirm that the MB switch of the circuit card is DOWN.

Using command “ASDT”, check whether station data is assigned to the circuits on the card.

Replace the card with a spare.

Perform the following when OPE lamp of a Line Circuit card illuminates, but the BL lamp (Red) for an

individual line flashes

Using command “MBST”, confirm that the specific line is not in Make Busy state.

Using command “ASDT”, check whether station data has been assigned to the line circuit.

Replace the circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 6

Page 385

Issue 2

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-057

Sheet 2/2

Abnormal Lamp Indications After System

Startup

Perform the following when the OPE lamp (Green) does not turn ON on a Trunk circuit card.

Confirm that the MB switch of the circuit card is DOWN.

Using command “ATRK”, check whether Trunk data has been assigned for the circuits on the

card.

Replace the circuit card with a spare.

Perform the following when the OPE lamp of a Trunk circuit card turns ON, but the BL lamp (Red) for

an individual circuit flashes.

Confirm that the MB switch for each circuit of the card is OFF.

Using command “MBTK”, confirm that the trunk circuit is not in Make Busy state.

Using command “ATRK”, check whether trunk data has been assigned for the trunk circuit.

Replace the circuit card with a spare.

Perform the following before replacing a circuit card which is considered defective with a spare.

Confirm the switch settings on the circuit card.

Poor contact at the connector portion of the circuit card may be responsible for the malfunction.

Check the circuit card once again by inserting and extracting it two or three times.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 6 ND-71548 (E)

Page 386

Issue 2

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-058

Sheet 1/1

DT (Dial Tone) Connection Fault

START

Dial tone is not heard.

On the MDF, check the cross connections between the telephone and the corresponding line

circuit.

Check whether LT cable is securely connected to the PIM.

Replace LC card with a spare.

DT cannot be heard from one or more lines of the same circuit card.

Replace LC card with a spare.

DT cannot be heard from the lines accommodated by a specific PIM.

Check the switch settings on the TSW/MUX circuit card.

Replace TSW/MUX card with a spare.

Check the switch settings on the TSW circuit card.

Replace TSW card with a spare.

Check whether the “MT24 TSW” cable is securely inserted to the connectors on the front edge

of TSW and MUX cards.

END

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 6

Page 387

Issue 2

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-059

Sheet 1/2

Station to Station Connection Fault

START

Dial Tone (DT) is still heard after a digit is dialed (cannot break dial tone)

A specific RST card is involved

A specific LC card is involved

A specific UNIT card is involved

Entire System is involved

Reorder Tone (ROT) is heard after a station number is dialed.

Using MAT command “ANPD/ANPDL/ANPDN,” check “Necessary Number of Digits” data.

Using command “ASPA/ASPAL/ASPAN,” check “Special Number” data.

Using command “ASDT,” check “Station” data.

Using command “ATNR,” check “Tenant Restriction Class” data.

Ring Back Tone (RBT) is heard, but the bell at the called station remains silent.

Check whether the called station is assigned the correct LENS data in command “ASDT.”

When all the stations accommodated in a specific PIM do not ring, replace PWR circuit card

with a spare.

If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC circuit card, replace LC card with a

spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 6 ND-71548 (E)

Page 388

Issue 2

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-059

Sheet 2/2

Station to Station Connection Fault

After the call has been answered, noise is heard or the speech path is one-way.

If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC circuit card, replace the card with

a spare.

If the fault involves a specific PIM, replace either the MUX or TSW circuit card with a spare.

If noise is heard throughout the entire system, replace the TSW circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 389

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

CHAPTER 7 WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

This Chapter explains various kinds of work and site cleaning, etc. which the installer must perform after completing

installation tests so that the system can be cut over normally.

Upon completion of all the required tests, the technician must confirm or perform the following:

1. Office Data Management

2. Preparation of Test Result Reports

3. Mounting of the Front and Rear Covers

4. Attachment of Inter-frame Brackets

5. Site Cleaning

1. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT

This paragraph explains the method of creating backup of the Office Data and the method of protecting the Of-

fice Data.

The PBX executes various kinds of processing according to the results of access by the CPU to the Data Memory

in which the Office Data are stored. If the contents of Data Memory become faulty, it may result in erroneous

operation of the system or in a system down. If any part of the Office Data has been illegally changed, it may

also bring about a trouble the same as in the case of a fault occurrence to the Data Memory.

Thus, upon completion of the installation tests, ensure to create backup of the Office Data and provide a proper

measure of office data protection.

1.1 Preservation of Office Data

The following items should be kept at the job site after the installation test has been completed for preservation

of office data.

1. Office Data Programming Sheets

Since the office data programming sheets should reflect the latest data at all times, entries into the office

data programming sheets must be made with pencil.

2. Flash Card for Storing Data

If a major change is made to the office data, especially a change involving System Data (command “ASYD/

ASYDL/ASYDN”), the system may not function as expected afterward. To prepare for such an occurrence,

two flash cards should be kept on hand; one contains office data before the change, the other contains office

data after the change. The flash card containing the data before the change allows the technician to restore

the previous (running) condition if the system does not operate properly with the new data.

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 390

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

2. PREPARATION OF TEST RESULT REPORT

When submitting a report of test results to the end user or when performing test with customer’s representatives

attending, prepare Test Result Report and record the test results into the prepared Test Result Report.

3. MOUNTING OF THE FRONT AND REAR COVERS

When mounting the front cover and the rear cover of the PBX, follow the procedure below.

START

Inspection Set all MB switches back to their positions prior to the

installation tests. Confirm that all circuit cards are

mounted in the proper slots according to the Bayface

Layout.

Mounting of Side Covers Referring to Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3, mount the

side covers onto the Modules and the Fan Unit.

Mounting of Rear Covers Modules Referring to Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5, mount the rear

covers.

Fan Unit Referring to Figure 7-6 mount the rear covers.

Mounting of Front Covers Modules Referring to Figure 7-7 through Figure 7-9, mount the

front cover (A).

Check Confirm that the mounted covers do not contact any of

the cables, circuit cards, etc.

END

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 391

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-1 Mounting of the Covers

07/31/02

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 392

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-2 Side Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0)

SCREW

FRONT

REAR

SIDE COVER

07/31/02

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 393

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-3 Side Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

REAR

SIDE COVER

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 394

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-4 Rear Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0)

SCREW

REAR SIDE

REAR COVER

SIDE VIEW

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 395

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-5 Rear Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

MODULE

REAR SIDE

REAR COVER

SCREW

MODULE

REAR COVER

SIDE VIEW

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 396

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-6 Rear Cover Mounting Method (FANU)

FANU

REAR COVER

SCREW

FANU

REAR COVER

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 397

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-7 Front Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0)

FRONT COVER

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 398

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-8 Front Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

Mount the Front Cover onto the module using screws.

FRONT COVER

SCREW

Note: The Front Cover can be set to open

to either the left side or right side.

The Front Cover in this figure is

open to the left side as an example.

When it is to open to right side,

mount the Front Cover onto the

frame by setting the respective hing-

es on the left side of the frame and

the Front Cover.

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 399

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-9 Front Cover Mounted Method (FANU)

FANU

FRONT COVER C(U)

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 400

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

4. ATTACHMENT OF INTER-FRAME BRACKETS

This section covers how to attach inter-frame brackets between the cabinets.

Figure 7-10 Locations of Inter-frame Brackets

TOPU

PIM1

IMG0

TOPU

PIM1

IMG1

TOPU

PIM1

IMG2

TOPU

PIM1

IMG3

Inter-frame Brackets

BASEU TSWM BASEU BASEU

LPM BASEU DUMMY DUMMY

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

FANU FANU FANU FANU

PIM2 PIM2 PIM2 PIM2

PIM3 PIM3 PIM3 PIM3

When the maximum four-IMG configuration is adopted, the inter-frame brackets should be attached in the

following locations.

(MGC)

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 401

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

STEP 1: Referring to the Figure 7-11 through Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (E) between the modules.

Figure 7-11 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets

STEP 2: Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (A) with the screws.

STEP 3: Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (B) with the screws.

Bracket (E)

(PIM)

(LPM/PIM)

Dedicated screws for

inter-module stabilization.

Note

Note: These screws are appended when obtaining the module components from NEC.

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 402

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-11 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets (Continued)

SL-C.P.B.M.S x 4 x 8 x 3GF

Bracket (D)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)

Bracket (F)

(BASEU)

(FANU)

(PIM)

PL-C.P.I.M.S x 4 x 10 x 15 BF

P.I.WA x 4 x 15 BF

#2.ST.L.WA x 4 x 15 BF

A.HEX.I.N. x 4 x 15 BF

ND-71548 (E) CHAPTER 7

Page 403

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-11 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets (Continued)

STEP 4: Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (D) with the screws.

STEP 5: Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (F) with the screws.

Bracket (E)

Bracket (D)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)

Bracket (F)

Bracket (B)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)

CHAPTER 7 ND-71548 (E)

Page 404

Issue 2

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

5. SITE CLEANING

Upon completion of the works described in Section 1 to 4 of this Chapter, execute or confirm the following

items:

• Restore the cross connections arranged for test purposes to their original conditions.

• Clean around the Module Group and the MDF.

• Collect and organize all test equipment, tools, etc. used during the installation tests.

• Dispose of dust, trash, etc.

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE MAY, 2002 DATE AUGUST, 2002 DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Installation Manual Revision Sheets 1/6

ND-71548(E)

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

i 1 2

ii 1 2

iii 1 2

iv 1 2

v 1 2

vi 1 2

vii 1 2

viii 1 2

ix 1 2

x 1 2

xi 1 2

xii 1 2

1 1 2

2 1 2

312

5 1 2

6 1 2

712

9 1 2

10 1 2

11 1 2

12 1 2

13 1 2

14 1 2

15 1 2

16 1 2

17 1 2

18 1 2

19 1 2

20 1 2

21 1 2

22 1 2

23 1 2

24 1 2

25 1 2

26 1 2

27 1 2

28 1 2

29 1 2

30 1 2

31 1 2

32 1 2

33 1 2

34 1 2

35 1 2

36 1 2

37 1 2

38 1 2

39 1 2

40 1 2

41 1 2

42 1 2

43 1 2

44 1 2

45 1 2

46 1 2

47 1 2

48 1 2

49 1 2

50 1 2

51 1 2

52 1 2

53 1 2

54 1 2

55 1 2

56 1 2

57 1 2

58 1 2

59 1 2

60 1 2

61 1 2

62 1 2

63 1 2

64 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE MAY, 2002 DATE AUGUST, 2002 DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Installation Manual Revision Sheets 2/6

ND-71548(E)

65 1 2

66 1 2

67 1 2

68 1 2

69 1 2

70 1 2

71 1 2

72 1 2

73 1 2

74 1 2

75 1 2

76 1 2

77 1 2

78 1 2

79 1 2

80 1 2

81 1 2

82 1 2

83 1 2

84 1 2

85 1 2

86 1 2

87 1 2

88 1 2

89 1 2

90 1 2

91 1 2

92 1 2

93 1 2

94 1 2

95 1 2

96 1 2

97 1 2

98 1 2

99 1 2

100 1 2

101 1 2

102 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

103 1 2

104 1 2

105 1 2

106 1 2

107 1 2

108 1 2

109 1 2

110 1 2

111 1 2

112 1 2

113 1 2

114 1 2

115 1 2

116 1 2

117 1 2

118 1 2

119 1 2

120 1 2

121 1 2

122 1 2

123 1 2

124 1 2

125 1 2

126 1 2

127 1 2

128 1 2

129 1 2

130 1 2

131 1 2

132 1 2

133 1 2

134 1 2

135 1 2

136 1 2

137 1 2

138 1 2

139 1 2

140 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE MAY, 2002 DATE AUGUST, 2002 DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Installation Manual Revision Sheets 3/6

ND-71548(E)

141 1 2

142 1 2

143 1 2

144 1 2

145 1 2

146 1 2

147 1 2

148 1 2

149 1 2

150 1 2

151 1 2

152 1 2

153 1 2

154 1 2

155 1 2

156 1 2

157 1 2

158 1 2

159 1 2

160 1 2

161 1 2

162 1 2

163 1 2

164 1 2

165 1 2

166 1 2

167 1 2

168 1 2

169 1 2

170 1 2

171 1 2

172 1 2

173 1 2

174 1 2

175 1 2

176 1 2

177 1 2

178 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

179 1 2

180 1 2

181 1 2

182 1 2

183 1 2

184 1 2

185 1 2

186 1 2

187 1 2

188 1 2

189 1 2

190 1 2

191 1 2

192 1 2

193 1 2

194 1 2

195 1 2

196 1 2

197 1 2

198 1 2

199 1 2

200 1 2

201 1 2

202 1 2

203 1 2

204 1 2

205 1 2

206 1 2

207 1 2

208 1 2

209 1 2

210 1 2

211 1 2

212 1 2

213 1 2

214 1 2

215 1 2

216 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE MAY, 2002 DATE AUGUST, 2002 DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Installation Manual Revision Sheets 4/6

ND-71548(E)

217 1 2

218 1 2

219 1 2

220 1 2

221 1 2

222 1 2

223 1 2

224 1 2

225 1 2

226 1 2

227 1 2

228 1 2

229 1 2

230 1 2

231 1 2

232 1 2

233 1 2

234 1 2

235 1 2

236 1 2

237 1 2

238 1 2

239 1 2

240 1 2

241 1 2

242 1 2

243 1 2

244 1 2

245 1 2

246 1 2

247 1 2

248 1 2

249 1 2

250 1 2

251 1 2

252 1 2

253 1 2

254 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

255 1 2

256 1 2

257 1 2

258 1 2

259 1 2

260 1 2

261 1 2

262 1 2

263 1 2

264 1 2

265 1 2

266 1 2

267 1 2

268 1 2

269 1 2

270 1 2

271 1 2

272 1 2

273 1 2

274 1 2

275 1 2

276 1 2

277 1 2

278 1 2

279 1 2

280 1 2

281 1 2

282 1 2

283 1 2

284 1 2

285 1 2

286 1 2

287 1 2

288 1 2

289 1 2

290 1 2

291 1 2

292 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE MAY, 2002 DATE AUGUST, 2002 DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Installation Manual Revision Sheets 5/6

ND-71548(E)

293 1 2

294 1 2

295 1 2

296 1 2

297 1 2

298 1 2

299 1 2

300 1 2

301 1 2

302 1 2

303 1 2

304 1 2

305 1 2

306 1 2

307 1 2

308 1 2

309 1 2

310 1 2

311 1 2

312 1 2

313 1 2

314 1 2

315 1 2

316 1 2

317 1 2

318 1 2

319 1 2

320 1 2

321 1 2

322 1 2

323 1 2

324 1 2

325 1 2

326 1 2

327 1 2

328 1 2

329 1 2

330 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

331 1 2

332 1 2

333 1 2

334 1 2

335 1 2

336 1 2

337 1 2

338 1 2

339 1 2

340 1 2

341 1 2

342 1 2

343 1 2

344 1 2

345 1 2

346 1 2

347 1 2

348 1 2

349 1 2

350 1 2

351 1 2

352 1 2

353 1 2

354 1 2

355 1 2

356 1 2

357 1 2

358 1 2

359 1 2

360 1 2

361 1 2

362 1 2

363 1 2

364 1 2

365 1 2

366 1 2

367 1 2

368 1 2

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE MAY, 2002 DATE AUGUST, 2002 DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Installation Manual Revision Sheets 6/6

ND-71548(E)

369 1 2

370 1 2

371 1 2

372 1 2

373 1 2

374 1 2

375 1 2

376 1 2

377 1 2

378 1 2

379 1 2

380 1 2

381 1 2

382 1 2

383 1 2

384 1 2

385 1 2

386 1 2

387 1 2

388 1 2

389 1 2

390 1 2

391 1 2

392 1 2

393 1 2

394 1 2

395 1 2

396 1 2

397 1 2

398 1 2

399 1 2

400 1 2

401 1 2

402 1 2

403 1 2

404 1 2

405 1

406 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678 PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

Nec 2400 Ipx Users Manual NEAX Installation

2400 IPX to the manual 1b97794c-ce2c-4eaa-a432-22de7bb45709

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation